X ^ewburypart. X [S^<>c><>o<>o<>c<>o<><] ^*^ -^2 REESE LIBRARY t* UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA Heaired. k^^a^^^,,,,^8 .J^ Accessions No.^,/^. SX^i^^ ^helf No. .IclHM/A^. f A i^f-^x- ^x-u,.^L. iiiiil HEBREIY CHRESTOMATHY DESIGNED AS THE FIRST VOLUME OP A COURSE OF HEBREW STUDY. BY MOSES STUART Associate Professor of Sacred Literature in the Theological Institlition A V - at Andover. . , ... ,^N V*' uF THE ''/" UNIVEESITY %9. ANDOVER : FLAGS AND CODLD, PCBLISHEES AND PRINTERS. Codman Press. DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, to wit: District Clerk's Office. Be it remembered, that on the twenty fourth day of January, A. D. 1829, in the fifty third year of the Independence of the United States of America, Moses Stuart, of the said district, has deposited in this office the title of a book, the ri^ht whereof he claims as Author, in tlie words following, to wit .- " A Hebrew Chrestomathy designed as the first volume of a course of Hebrew study. Uy Moses Stuart, Associate Professor of Sacred Literature in the Theological Institution at Andover." In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, "An Act for the encouragement of Learning, by securing the copies cf maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned :" and also to an Act entitled, " An act supplementary to an Act, entitled, An Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein mentioned ; and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving and etch- ing historical and other prints." TOHIV W nAViq I Clerk of the District JUHJN W. UAVIS, I of Massachusetts. -^z/^yS' >> f PREFACE. The title given to this little volume, (Chrestomathy, from the Greek XQ^^^V f^oidi^^ simple instruction, easy learning)^ may seem strange to an ear accustomed merely to our common circle of Eng- lish words, among which it is not found. It has, however, been long in general use, among most of the nations on the continent of Europe; and not in the Latin language only, but in their own respective dialects. It is a convenient technical word ; and on this account, I have adopted it as the title of this work. Chrestomathies in Latin and Greek, have long been employed for the instruction of youth, in most of the countries of Europe. The utility of them is so evident, that scarcely any one has ventur- ed to call it in question. A great variety of them are now current in our own country ; although they do not bear the appellation to which I have been adverting. So general, moreover, is the convic- tion of their utility, that the practice of employing them has ex- tended to all the modern languages, which are studied among us to any considerable extent. The French, the Italian, the German, and the Spanish, all have their respective Chrestomathies ; and this, to the great convenience of learner and teacher. On the continent of Europe, however, where Chrestomathies in nearly every language that is studied, are almost universally em- ployed, there has been some diversity of opinion among the learned, about the expediency of employing Chrestomathies in the Hebrew language. The late J. G. Eichhorn, of Gottingen, so well known to the literary world, in his Bibliothek, (a long continued and very able work, made up of learned reviews, essays, etc.), was accustom- ed to speak with much disregard of Hebrew Chrestomathies, and to protest against them. Others have done the same thing. But the reason of this is evident ; and it must be acknowledged, also, that it was sufficient. Of all the Hebrew Chrestomathies which I have yet examined, (and I have seen most of them which have acquired any considerable name), none have been conducted on a plan, which affords substantial aid to the learner. Most of them have been almost a mere reprint of select parts of the Bible ; and often times, of some of the most difficult parts of all the Scriptures, merely be- cause the rhetorical qualities of the pieces selected were v;ery stri- king. Against such Chrestomathies Eichhorn might well protest ; for why should not the student at once purchase his Hebrew Bible, and study in that the lessons printed in his Chrestomathy, rather DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, to wit: District Clerk's Office. Be it remembered, that on the twenty fourth day of January, A. D. 1829, in the fifty third year of the Independence of the United btates of America, Moses Stuart, of the said district, has deposited in this office the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as Author, in tlie words following, to wit ; " A Hebrew Chrestomathy designed as the first volume of a course of Hebrew Btudy. By Moses Stuart, Associate Professor of Sacred Literature in the Theological Institution at Andover." In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, "An Act for the encouragement of Learning, by securing the copies cf maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned :" and also to an Act entitled, *' An act supplementary to an Act, entitled. An Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein mentioned ; and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving and etch- ing historical and other prints." JOHN W^AVIS, j Sl;fJ*' PT PREFACE. The title given to this little volume, (Chrestomathy, from the Greek ^QriGirj fjddrj, simple instruction, easy learning)^ may seem strange to an ear accustomed merely to our common circle of Eng- lish words, among which it is not found. It has, however, been long in general use, among most of the nations on the continent of Europe ; and not in the Latin language only, but in their own respective dialects. It is a convenient technical word ; and on this account, I have adopted it as the title of this work. Chrestomathies in Latin and Greek, have long been employed for the instruction of youth, in most of the countries of Europe. The utility of them is so evident, that scarcely any one has ventur- ed to call it in question. A great variety of them are now current in our own country ; although they do not bear the appellation to which I have been adverting. So general, moreover, is the convic- tion of their utility, that the practice of employing them has ex- tended to all the modern languages, which are studied among us to any considerable extent. The French, the Italian, the German, and the Spanish, all have their respective Chrestomathies ; and this, to the great convenience of learner and teacher. On the continent of Europe, however, where Chrestomathies in nearly every language that is studied, are almost universally em- ployed, there has been some diversity of opinion among the learned, about the expediency of employing Chrestomathies in the Hebrew language. The late J. G. Eichhorn, of Gottingen, so well known to the literary world, in his Blhliothek, (a long continued and very able work, made up of learned reviews, essays, etc.), was accustom- ed to speak with much disregard of Hebrew Chrestomathies, and to protest against them. Others have done the same thing. But the reason of this is evident ; and it must be acknowledged, also, that it was sufficient. Of all the Hebrew Chrestomathies which I have yet examined, (and I have seen most of them which have acquired any considerable name), none have been conducted on a plan, which affords substantial aid to the learner. Most of them have been almost a mere reprint of select parts of the Bible ; and often times, of some of the most difficult parts of all the Scriptures, merely be- cause the rhetorical qualities of the pieces selected were v:ery stri- king. Against such Chrestomathies Eichhorn might well protest ; for why should not the student at once purchase his Hebrew Bible, and study in that the lessons printed in his Chrestomathy, rather /UT? DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, to wit: District Clerk's Office. Be it remembered, that on the twenty fourth day of January, A. D. 1829, in the fifty third year of the Independence of the United btates of America, Moses Stuart, of the said district, has deposited in this office the title of a book, the right whereof he claims as Author, in the words following, to icit . " A Hebrew Chrestoniathy designed as the first volume of a course of Hebrew study, iiy Moses Stuart, Associate Professor of Sacred Literature in the Theological Institution at Andover." In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, "An Act for the encouragement of Learning, by securing the copies cf maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned :" and also to an Act entitled, " An act supplementary to an Act, entitled. An Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies during the times therein mentioned ; and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving and etch- ing historical and other prints." TOHiM w TiAVTS I Clerk of the District JUHJN W. UAVlfcJ, I of Massachusetts. PREFACE. The title given to this little volume, (Chrestomathy, from the Greek %QYi(5iri /^a-Orj^ simple instruction, easy learning), may seem strange to an ear accustomed merely to our common circle of Eng- lish words, among which it is not found. It has, however, been long in general use, among most of the nations on the continent of Europe ; and not in the Latin language only, but in their own respective dialects. It is a convenient technical word ; and on this account, I have adopted it as the title of this work. Chrestomathies in Latin and Greek, have long been employed for the instruction of youth, in most of the countries of Europe. The utility of them is so evident, that scarcely any one has ventur- ed to call it in question. A great variety of them are now current in our own country ; although they do not bear the appellation to which I have been adverting. So general, moreover, is the convic- tion of their utility, that the practice of employing them has ex- tended to all the modern languages, which are studied among us to any considerable extent. The French, the Italian, the German, and the Spanish, all have their respective Chrestomathies ; and this, to the great convenience of learner and teacher. On the continent of Europe, however, where Chrestomathies in nearly every language that is studied, are almost universally em- ployed, there has been some diversity of opinion among the learned, about the expediency of employing Chrestomathies in the Hebrew language. The late J. G. Eichhorn, of Gottingen, so well known to the literary world, in his Bibliothek, (a long continued and very able work, made up of learned reviews, essays, etc.), was accustom- ed to speak with much disregard of Hebrew Chrestomathies, and to protest against them. Others have done the same thing. But the reason of this is evident ; and it must be acknowledged, also, that it was sufficient. Of all the Hebrew Chrestomathies which I have yet examined, (and I have seen most of them which have acquired any considerable name), none have been conducted on a plan, which affords substantial aid to the learner. Most of them have been almost a mere reprint of select parts of the Bible ; and often times, of some of the most difficult parts of all the Scriptures, merely be- cause the rhetorical qualities of the pieces selected were very stri- king. Against such Chrestomathies Eichhorn might well protest ; for why should not the student at once purchase his Hebrew Bible, and study in that the lessons printed in his Chrestomathy, rather PREFACE. than purchase another book which offered him nothing more than a part of the simple text of his Bible ? A few Chrestomathies have contained notes, mostly of a kind which have respect to higher or lower criticism ; but very few offer any considerable assistance in respect to grammatical analysis. Of course, books of this class have never satisfied the wants of begin- ners, and therefore they have soon fallen into neglect. So far as my knowledge of Hebrew Chrestomathies extends, none have yet been published, which are like the present in regard to the specific object to be attained. It remains therefore for an experiment to be made, in order to determine whether a Hebrew Chrestomathy, more fully adapted to the wants of beginners than has been usual, will not find as good encouragement, and be of as much utility, as a Latin or Greek one. On this experiment the present little volume ventures ; not claiming to have accomplish- ed all which may be desirable, but aiming at least to break the way, in which others may follow, and do for the Hebrew that ^vhich has in some cases been so admirably accomplished for other ancient, and for the modern languages. That which is done viva voce in the lecture-room, and addres- sed to the ear of Hebrew students, on the coi.Uinent of Europe, it is my aim to exhibit here to the eye of our students, on printed pages. The author of this small volume, while he cherishes the highest re- gard for the profound and extensive erudition of many scholars and teachers in the old world still professes himself unable to see how a beginner in Hebrew, wh receives oral instruction ex cathedra^ (and writes down as well as he can, which at the best must be very badly at first, what is dictated to him, phrase by phrase, or word by word, and then cons over what he has written), can be more profit- ed, than to have the same instruction, of which he has made but an imperfect copy in his notes,/)///?/ exhibited in a well printed book, and so arranged, that recurrence to it is, at all times, easy and with- out the danger of mistake. With all his deference to the great masters of teaching in Europe, he cannot persuade himself, that in this point they are not mistaken, at least, with regard to the eleman- f/-y part of linguistic study; and above all, in regard to such a language as the Hebrew, the writinix down of which is so difficult for the unpractised beginner. No wonder that so few in Europe ever pursue the study of the Hebrew to any great length, while the process of acquiring it is made so tedious; and while fit maybe added) their studies are conducted on a plan, which makes the lear- ner rather a passive recipient than an arfive arrant. The human mind, from its very nature, cannot long follow such a course of stu- dy with much satisfaction. In regard to the selection of pieces for this Chrestomathy, it has been my design to choose those which are easy, and, in some res- pect or other, of special interest ; and which may therefore serve PREFACE. at once to excite the student and to instruct him. If any one should suggest, that there are other pieces in the Old Testament of equal or of superior interest, and which ought to have been prefeired, I shall not dispute the point with him ; for in a book, which is nil divine, and of such a compass as the Old Testament, it would be strange if some thirty chapters should comprise all that is striking, and useful, and beautiful. It were easy to make out many more volumes of Chrestomathy, like the present, and yet to leave much behind, which one must pronounce very excellent. My plan has been, to take that which might serve to aid and to instruct the be- ginner ; which is easy, and yet inviting ; and in following this plan, I have, of course, omitted most of the awfully sublime parts of the Old Testament, nearly all of which are replete with exegetical and grammatical difficulties. How incongruous it would be, in a selec- tion of such pieces as the present, to be guided only by rhetorical taste, and to make out a book merely containing '' the beauties of the Bible," no considerate person will fail to perceive. I have extended the selection so far, as may serve the purposes of an introduction to the regular, exegetical study of the Hebrew. My views of the importance of accurate, grammatical analysis, are sufficiently explained in the notes appended to this volume. In es- timating the present work, I must beg the reader to remember, that my principal design is, to aid the student in the ffrmnmafical study of the Hebrew. All else besides this, is added for the sake of smoothing the way, and making it more attractive. No student of any understanding, can long content himself with the mere study of words, forms, and syntactical constructions ; he must understand, in some good degree, the meaning of what he reads, in order to take any pleasure in it. Recognizing this principle of our nature, I have all along, from the very outset, added such brief exegetical re- marks as may assist the beginner, and make his progress more agreeable to him. As the Notes advance, they become (as is pro- per) more exegetical, and less grammatical. But no grammatical difficulty whatever is wittingly passed over, without an attempt at explanation. The exegetical remarks are, for the most part, very brief; but, I would fain hope, such as are better adapted to begin- ners, than if they were more formal. What is sometimes given in a single sentence, has cost me hours of study. But the parade of learning would ill become a book of this kind ; and I would rather hazard the imputation of having written too briefly, than of havin^g made out a great book, which the learner could neither relish nor understand. A case like the present I take to be one, in regard to which it may be truly said, fit'ya (ii^Uov ntyu xaxof. Some of the investigations, which led to remarks made at the close of various pieces in this selection, have cost time and effort which critical students, and probably such only, will kmw well how to estimate. If these remarks should prove to be useful to the PREFACE. learner, either in the way of instruction or of excitement to fur- ther investigation, it will be more than a compensation for all the labour bestowed on them. The expense of publishing books of criticism on the Hebrew language, and of printing Hebrew, is a thing that is yet but very imperfectly understood, in our country. That the public may be enabled to make some proper estimate of it, and so to judge, on good grounds, whether the price of books like the present is put too high, it is proper to state, that the labour of correcting a printed sheet of Hebrew, with the accents, is at least twmly jive times as n)uch as that of correcting English printed with a type of the like size; and that the labour of the printer in setting up and correcting such a sheet, is at least six times as much as that of executing a sheet in English. Then the labour of the original writing or com- position, where so many Hebrew words are to be written as occur in the notes to this volume, is, at least, /owr times as much as that of composing a like quantity in mere English. Besides all this, no sheet is contained in the present volume, which has not, in the printing, gone through at least jive several corrections or revisals, besides the corrections of the printers. Let those who know how to estimate the severity of such labour, judge, in view of these facts, whether the present book and others of a similar character, can reasonably be asked for at a lower price than that at which they are actually sold. If the reader should find the Hebrew text contained in this vol- ume to be accurately printed, (which I trust will be the case), he must attribute this, in good part, to the untiring diligence and praise-worthy accuracy of Mr. William G. Schauffler, of Stuttgard in Germany, a member of the present Middle Class in our Theo- logical Seminary, who made the three first revisals of it, as it came from the printers' hands ; to the kind and valuable aid of Mr. C. E. Stowe, one of the assistant Teachers of the Greek and He- brew languages here, for the present year, who went through with another complete revisal ; and to the unwearied diligence and pa- tience of the printers and^)ublishers, who have spared no pains to accomplish all which I wished to be done. Several errors in the text of Van der Hooght, (from which the Hebrew is copied), have been detected and corrected ; but how many more are committed, time will develope. He who has once printed Hebrew, will never boast of security against being detected in some errors. The types break off or draw out, and frustrate the hopes which his la- bours at correction had led him to cherish ; the ink does not always reach the minuter vowels and accents so as to give a due impres- sion ; and where there are so many objects of attention, as the printing of Hebrew with vowels and accents necessarily presents, humcmum est err are. 1 can only say, that I have done all which ray time and circumstances rendered it possible for me to do, in or- PREFACE. Til der that the text might be correct. The whole book has gone through the hands of Mr. Stowe, as well as my own, in the correc- tion ; and although not immaculate, will, I hope, be found to be so far accurate as not to give the student much trouble. The reader will observe, that from the 5Gth page onward, 16 pages are numbered, 56, 566, etc. The reason of this is, that when the printing of the book was commenced, both parts of it, viz. the Hebrew text, and the Notes, were begun at the same time, and 56 pages were allowed for the first part, so that the Notes were com- menced with p, 57 etc. But in printing, the numerous breaks in the Hebrew text, and especially the poetic part of the Hebrew, oc- cupied much more room than was anticipated ; so that, in order to comprise what was desirable in the Chrestomathy, it was necessary to extend the Hebrew 16 pages beyond the space that had been left for it. This will occasion no inconvenience to the reader ; but it is proper to say, on account of the publishers, that this volume con- tains 16 pages more than it seems to contain. As the circle of elementary Hebrew books is now completed, and a Lexicon, Grammar, and Chrestomathy will not, all together, cost more than the former price of a Hebrew Lexicon, it is to be hoped that the progress of Hebrew study may keep pace with the facility and cheapness of the means to aid it. Hebrew is now ac- cessible to all classes of people, who may wish to learn it. Private persons, for their own advantage and gratification, may study it. I venture to affirm, without the fear of being contradicted by any one who has had experience, that the Hebrew is now more accessible than the Latin or Greek, and can be learned in less than half the time which either of these languages costs. The apparent difficul- ties, at the outset, arise from the difference of its written characters, (especially of the vowels), from those of our western languages. These difficulties, however, speedily vanish ; and then the simplici- ty of arrangement, of declension, and of conjugation, in the Hebrew language, is such, that the progress is much more rapid than either in Latin or Greek. The imaginary terrors, in which this language has been clothed, belong to some of the older books of instruction, and not to the Hebrew itself. I do most earnestly hope that the day is coming, when the subject of Hebrew study will be treated with more candour than it has been in our country, for a century past ; and that the obscurity which has been thrown around it, by such treatises of former days as have invested it with confused and confounding mists, and the terrors also, which have been merely imag- ined to exist by such as are reluctant to make the exertion demanded of those who embark in the study of it, or have not enough of the energetic spirit of acquisition to urge them forward in such a study, will vanish away before the illuminating and enterprising spirit of the day, and never more make their appearance. Incepisse dimi- dium est, A moderate part of the time that has been spent by Ill PREFACE. many an excellent minister of the gospel, in the pursuit of Com- mentary on the orioinal Hebrew Scriptures, in order that he might understand the meaning of them, (which, when he attains it, is on- ly a secondary source, and the correctness of which, he must, with- out a personal knowledge of the Hebrew, often be unable to esti- mate), would have enabled him to go directly himself to the origin- al source, and to satisfy his own mind by original evidence. May the time speedily arrive, when this will be better understood, and more extensively believed ! Should the present volume meet with sufficient encourage- ment to open the way for more works of a simUar nature, it is my design to 20 on with the selection of other appropriate parts of the Hebrew Scriptures, so as to complete a full coijrse of ezegetical stvfh in the Hebrew language. The present volume is designed as the first in such a series. The extent of such a Course of Sla- dif, will depend on the encouragement given to works of this nature in our country, and on the measure of health which it may please a kind Providence to bestow upon me. It is not my design to pub- lish in extenso any more of the Hebrew text, as in the present vol- ume ; because every student should of course have a Hebrew Bible. A selection, however, from the Hebrew Scriptures, adapted to a proper course of Hebrew study, is what I intend to make; and on this, will be written critical, grammatical, and exegetical notes. The last will, of course, be the predominant ones, in all future publications designed to be a continuation of the present. But as the whole course will be adapted to beginners^ so more par- ticular attention will be paid to their actual wants, than any of our present commentaries have given. The forms, syntax, and etymology of words will never be neglected, nor any pains spared to lead the student to an accurate and fundamental knowledge of what proper- ly belongs to philology. M. STUART. Theol. Seminary ; Andover, Jan. 8, 1829. PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. TERES. No. I. ( 212. seq. Par. I.) Mj? IDJP b^jD b'^12 -)D^ dhi2'-\''qi2 ydk L:p_^ (a) b^jp t3p_d Drd ^I2jp ts^-f DDt) ]t?to ntpj'P Y^jP t njpiD Y|V^ t)V^ -oVd (6) No. II. ( 220 seq. Par. II.) tCV^p) ViD^ Vr:;; dp;; n:^;; ]bj? (6) No. III. (Comp. 78 seq.) iDris D^D D3:d n^3 )m p'^'^ ^n ^m np_3 Vols No. IV. (Comp. 78 seq ) $nip ^Dp tiSD bDD ^DD nD^ -Ci^^nD p!: IDT No. V. (Comp. % 78 seq.) }t|2p^ 5iDp, n522 1522 "^aD !:|"?D "tjaa -^oa -^^a naV 10 PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. No. VI. (Comp. 78 seq.) t pD'n b^i^ -itDB nnD ns3 nn'i ;2i:^& iriniD inr^ ^ns No. VII. (Comp. 78 seq.) nsjp rm. is^ isd n^o 'qnD i^^^ nsb 15^^ int No. VIII. (Comp. 78 seq.) \^t>t:i :iDE 'yhti dds rps n!:!) nts r^^'i itis^ n^5 No. IX. (Comp. <5 78 seq.) t a'la 1:13 ana ids I -r T T T No. X. (^ 224 seq. Par. III. IV.) t nT:? ^"2^ ^s:p np.n *!]?:ri nnn npn y^n tiiDn ^^n No. XI. ( 229 seq. Par. V.) t nn3 n5?D ^:pt3 n3?r\ i;j?'j: ^:pe ins ins nnn nm No. XII. ( 233 seq. Par. VI.; nb& nm nn^i r\2t nss n^r nnt nn^ 3?^:i nDs ~T -T -r ~ T ~ -r "t ~T ~T ~ T ~ ~ T " T No. XIII. (Comp. 111 seq. also Par. V. etc.) osn pn'1 nn-} :Ptpn u:?n n::s-i pnn ann s^i"} (a) tnnn yno ti-iB pna qnn p-it ai'i x^y^ 015 '^12 (6) {.-iD-i -1533 nttT V3 in -int: ns3 nsa laa nad () PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. f I No. XIV. ( 224 seq. Par. IV.) thiA nn^N^ ^T^^ bn^ ^^Ti^ i"i^ ^n^^ n:^^ pDi^ b^^ No. XV. ( 240 seq. Par. VII.) t nsfi^ nnwv ^Dnfi< ^v|Dw>^ nn.v Vidwv nriN* ^dh No. XVI. ( 243 seq. Par. VIII.) Dld'^ tdp*^ Tl-^ DD"^ ^V'^ lb^ UT ^^i^ ^n*^ ^TvV'^ (a) Dn^ y:?^ C]:?^^ n?i;; di; yp.^^ np.;; i^;; 5^5^ dn; (b) No. XVII. ( 248 seq. Par. IX.) *nD*^ it)'^ itri'' pr n^*^ ^^'^ dd'^ No. XVIII. ( 251. Par. X.) t na'*^ ns'^ ps^ no*^ ^D'^ t ::?2:^ nis:'^ iiis*^ n^*^ T T I X X X ~X X ~X X No. XIX. ( 252 seq. Par. XI.) rD'D3 nsD bti^ ^T3 ap3 ^dd did Vd3 niD :p:3 d::d ~x X X X >"-x X 1 x "x -X -X X No. XX. { 256 seq. Par. XII.) bby bbxi nan tisa V^a ppT ^V^ laa V^a ^j^js tta -X -X -X '-X xJ-x X /-x -X -X X X No. XXI. ( 267 seq. Par. XIII. XIV.) "i^s irjiD :^iD r|i5? n^::? nn niiri D'^ui p'liri n'^iti n'=)n(a) { iV^^ DID 12 PART I. EXAMPtES FOR PRAXIS. t ni3? nin :Pi!i (6) t r^'^'n l'^^ n'^n (c) No. XXTI. ( 276 seq. Par. XV.) ^122 N^D (wS^53) aCIZ ^rD iX"Jn NlD'l Nn t^yi^ 5^Da T T No. XXIIl. ( 280 seq. Par. XVT.) nsDS riD^ n-jD nos non jiidt nt]^ nn^ nV^s riDs t nr^ nil nip nop nip No. XXIV. ( 293.) tndD n33? r\i22 natd nntri ni;a nstii NOUNS MASCULINE. No. XXV. ( 345 seq. Par. XXV.) ri^dhp_ 1135 p^is m-5 1*^3 15 ip'ht o^n^, Vip 1^:? No. XXVI. ( 347 seq. Par. XXV.) r::?^ inipti by^i2 112Z12 loin isiwx ^:d^^ ^^^n JtJ~ t~;"~ tI" t; t t t ' T" ,y!:ia Hia ^Tia y^i? Tj-iya No. XXVII. ( 350 seq. Par. XXV.) p^n 112^ Qipr; ]^iDiS5 iit^^ j13:pi "ji^t] 0^:23? tiiip PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. No. XXVIII. ( 353 seq. Par. XXV.) atiT b:^^ no;' ip'^ pi2^ pm rci^ nni nui'^ min !?n3 T T T S^ OF THE '^ UNI^EESIT No. XXIX. ( 356 seq. Par. XXV.) ODn pn::? d^B b^^ nisp ^n-^ 'hiwH ^n 'nn^ n^a No. XXX. ( 359 seq. Par. XXV.) (1) ^ form, $ 363. in^ '-i?:^ hyji i^jP. nns?, '^5^3 nnn 'js^ tnwsi. 17*5. ins^. t nnn nn^. nos 5?!:d iphd (2) E form, $364. n^s n-dD np.^. fi^^s nn;'. na-j nnt ^^.^ tim ^d^ pjVn nns -in?; -is;, pipn ain -ipn nn ro: boB (3) O form, $ 3G5. nnh -i^b !:?i25 nDb ]na nnls ^n^ -)^> !:n> p>\ r r (4) ./f form in verbs "I5> and ''S, $ 366. ^)Z '^^b Y?n -1^2 1':? nvjj 1^2 ^"^^ b-jfi^ '^in "j^y t (wxi^*) i^itp ^i:j? ^y^ (5) Forms derived from verbs ! 7, $ 367. i^n 'M in. I'TP ipiD lya ina isn I'^'i tti lya ! i^is ijiD i-ia inb 1^3 lai 14 PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. O form of the earae. t^sj; "^p; '^nn "^12^1^ ^i^^n '^:i^i ^D"! '^b'^i '^^d'i (6) Inf. Segholates, $ 368. Ci^'1 ns^s? DwST D?^^ nnn iridn &iri '^i'^ 15:1 No. XXXI. ( 371 seq. Par. XXV.) Dns ^nb nn> n?.*T^ diP.n'^ p2i^ Dirin ^qn ilis nn^ No. XXXII. ( 374 seq. Par. XXV.) d^w>i pi2^)2 Tj-^nio nrdwv 1^!: pT ^nn rop ds::? t3? No. XXXIII. ( 377 seq. Par. XXV.) nt^ nip nii53 non^ nn. ni^^D mip^ n>^i n?.^ tnoiDt] riM r\mi2 nbni2 nnrtj NOUNS FEMININE. No. XXXIV. ( 380 seq. Par. XXVI.) n:^^bn rh^^ii^ nV5?s n^^iti^ np^^'^ ndn5 r^&^i!^ niin nVnn n:Pin n^i:? nnVop ni'^ss n^^'^n'^ nnbs {man PART I. EXAMPLES FOR PRAXIS. 15 No. XXXV. ( 383 seq. Par. XXVI.) nnsJin f\:2b nii^^sn fi^bt): n^pD n^iDn n^n: No. XXXVI. ( 387 seq. Par. XXVI.) nsnn n!?s::? nnp*^. nnn ? n^^tdi^ nwn nsisn nsDp^D t nnn nnnp nsp5? nnriD nnnwv rrnn;; nnnn xjT tW-t tfjT Tr;T 'I'*' ''i'* "'I'.' No. XXXVII. ( 390 seq. Par. XXVI.) n^^tDM njPDti npM n^s^ n^.i>? rinnis n^anin nni'D njbn^ nnX^^q npVoD n!?h!:5 n?ii^ n"i5^^!a PART II. EASY SENTENCES FOR BEGINNERS. { ^sns nh^vv m^q&^-Vs 3. ^npnj;^. nnq '^^jbfij ntpisi, nn'^n. *^? ^^^^'^^"1 ^^ 8. t T\y^b'B;n mr^^b nn';ni 10. tn?;3 n^m-^^ np] nfi5T 30. 18. PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. { nitr^ nhnn phi i^3^5?s ^t ti3\v-^::-i~^3 3i. t ipnri 1^0 t])ii^^ ri.NTini iir nE^*; n^.isj.i^ iDnis 32. t :;r3-j3^ D'^p'^'is nVsDm n'^irtin^D nisr^ pinn 33. : i*i3?2 r::^ nin^i '^^I'n nsn^ mx nb 34. UVD3 11^^ npTjSs ^ID :pu:-) niis::? n'^ibn nn::?in 35. -innD nj'^s niDp-^ Y^^l^,?. ^^1^"^^ tii2prrti:^^ 36. t .ys^n np^ns '^jniin nn*^'? nns^sn nnc?.? 39. J aV'jrK i^ns^ ]nDi lii^ nVd'^ nissnn ^li'^i^ 40. :t5? li^tt innm ^m^ nis^t] n'^SwV ^nnj^ did 41. J n'^n-^np.T w\b^^ rr^sb r^^-niViiil nnnn ns? nVo 42. { nin^ nis^ ]nhT nn?!: n^^Di tiwb jqns^D 43. ^'^ns^ nr^in nj'di nnnfi^ tapnt; ::?p>-nD5^^ 44. t 'in'^3^ nn di!Dn-i<^ nnit: nnn n::?^ n'^td^ 45. I X T T isr -J- T X ... PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. 19 ^^)T. *^1^}. ^^.) ?^in ^^l^ ^?."'^5^. 47. nnri-dj^n^. inns n^sim ns^ 2ri}< iPips nnk 4a \ 'MTiihvb "i^bi ^^Ds p I'^n.V^ o:?s 49. tfi^np*^ nW^n^b i^sd^ ri'^nn 'ii^'n'^ ^^did '^nsto so. t iii^bp;^ i!?-.s'^n nb^K :pp^ti'; nron lyn ^^m 54. : nswviT)'; ^12 ni^^j nni ^n^^np_ bsb^^'; td\v m-i 55. t N"oin D^b^ns v^^'' niD-j>ib idsd n::?i-vxba 57. tnnfii^ n^DTS n'^s'^i np3^ is!? n^^nptd ij' 59. tnbsto^ ntDJ^ nin^^a^ nin^v n!?nD li^ni rr^in 60. *tnrii;; i^^iDnT mis irisj^ ni2p t^yip^ nrito* ei. t^nnnw^s Dsnn -js^tiV no^^ Vspi n:25? ^12x6 62. * Qeri r\^)z'^ 20 PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. tu^n^ ^"p \i TO3"-bm 1:3:2) n^h r^n v^ ^4. {Drr^rd-n."^ to:? mrr^ nw\h rri ny^iri iTi< 67. j'^'cpn 11tD^i^?a iiD ^n-; i^^i?! vdjj bVp.t? 69. IV- nswv'^n'^ n^o-'^s ciwy nniPin d^^^tiin nnt 72. t nin^ nViD nirb 'iiri^SD tdni n^d:? 73. t Dili-pis'^ nin*^ dw hiit "^e r^-^^v nmd 74 "^^^12^1^ D^52:? 'in::p*' nrivx p^'^s ::?irin!: n^x 75. t ^^nriiD-^^ ion nin-'S m^^n) rpjijS n^^ni^^D^ D'^an 78. PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. 2^1 :n.v22-i:s VB nnn^ i^^: nro^ n^r^^ nn^s 79. T -:r I jcis^n^i i^k^Vin'^nD nirT^-^&i^t3 nan 81. tis-non"^ nnhn '^idwv nin*^ did-'^3 li^n^ ^^3?d 82. ^n'^bDS i?23 Dift^ '^n^ ti'^ri^ sri'^Dn np^-ntj 86. I I -r v:v \^m^ isnni "^obis n:n?-''"i?'S^ nirr^tj 87. :nin'''^nr:V^'^ nn ni'^a ^^-^^^ b^s'-atj '^nri^ 89. It f : ' ) '\T ' r - T T : V^w^^n-'ps-!::? !:'i";5 'n^ti ^^niD ii^^:? nin^-^s I V IT T T - T I V y.' ^T ' : V ; I It ": T X ^- T -T( -: ^^T^l?. !^?.n ^'?i riinp^tD "DV^ip-i njn n^Qi-^'S D'^nnis "iri^in n&^n^ D-^^Qti JnnS n1b^^-^i^n 92. 22 PART II. SELECT SENTENCES. jr3'^:^n ^3t-^i^ n-^Djirii ^\-iw\^'^ ^i^i nn'^-is? in p^2*-n:2^ p-'^s 'ijir^'^ nD-awv t n^w>i^ini*i^ p^i 95. r - .. - !v* .--r -r J T - I- '-) V-;- A T 1 :- .- t 'Ti5''T^ '\'^b:^ in3i iVn^^i^ "^bn ' IT : T -r ; A t; IT ; /- t titiS3 ]^i!?^^ !:triv*^s ii^SD*^, '^s ddh nipn-n^ ^^ 97. t nns I'^b:? .vbn-'^s ^^.v :p)2i:^'^ inp3?2n n T X T 1 A" ~: 't-:i :( -i^b jt33'^nn 'iTO nrid^i -di3&^3 i^'^n-nn pw>^ 98. I I" ; - - - : S'.':^.' - ' re n^n'^-^ib t nb ri3 n'^B ) d.s^^ i^bi I'^ss bv>^-in 99. in'^tDx n^ "^nVp p tn^w><*i niiT^-ni^ di\^ p^i 100. n3?.sf, w>ibi ^^.^.^^, ^'^A ''^"'"'^^ '^^^.'^ ''T PART HI. SELECT PORTIONS OF THE HEBREW SCRIPTURES, IN PROSE AND POETRY. I. The original creation of the heavens and the earthy and the primitive state of the latter ; Gen. I. 1, 2. tD-^ian ^:^-V5? nsnn^ d^jt^j^ IT - ; - vc-.- - : v; II. The work of the first day ; Gen. I. 3 5. f^'^h t^ip 'ridn!:i aV^ ni^^^ Q^nS^ wNi-ip^i nrdnn 5 IT V 'v c :" vjv :r III. The work of the second day ; Gen. I. 6 8. V:s ^'inr) ^r\^^ "d^^ti ^rwi^ t'p'^ vp n'^n'Vi^ n^ji^i 6 I : " ^T / . - J . TT ; v; v -*~ ' ; - ' T|T V .; -J It T ( -'^n'^i D'^rsiri j'-^pn:? n^n^w^ .yip^i n^"^*^'''^ ^V"^^ ^ 24 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. IV. The work of the third day; Gen. !. 913. n-jj^^b c^n'^Nt fi^np^^i J I?""'"';,! ^^?'m ^^.>71 "H^. ^^ -^s D'^n'bx wvn^i t:^52'> ij^np c^sn nipti^^ vi^^' rntts M;:?_wvdVf>'5rj ^^"4"^ ^^H^?? ^^.^^!'^ '^^^ ^^ r2'v -iph-vpi nn::?-^n'^i jnrj-^3 D'^n'S^ &^n^i 13 V. T/ic work of the fourth day; Gen. I. 1419. -b? Tfi^nb^ d^b'^ri ip^na nn%v:q^'^\ni tc^D^i 13 niw>^:an ^Dis-nj^ D'^nV^ i2:>^^i tp-'^ri'^i vi?i is {vii^n-!?:? n\Hnb D^^tsn ppns n^n'b^ nni^ tii*^ npn-^n^l Dn:p-wi tnia-^s n'^nV^ &^Tii9 VI. TAe work of the fifth day; Gen. I. 2023. qij^i n-'^n triDD. yn^^ n'^bn'^isi': ^n"^?5 '^^>'^'!11 20 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. 25 'v c ':r vjv ;>- I viT T vi' I I* '"J VII. The work of the sixth day ; Gea. I. 2431. r\T^^h n^n 122?^: 'p>'!n '"^^.^^ ^^^^^. ^^^l\ ^^ ;" I /T T - It -.'ty T T J-.'TT T '.* ~ v.* T ' .'- ;"" It t t t>.. j tt -^3-n5^ tdh '^nn: nsn c^n^wv i52k^i t V"i&^fi"^5? 29 T V V T -T . y. ._- J .' IT T -^^-nvvi viiin-^D 'ss-bj? n'J35^ ;?nT 5?it :y^:s^ tt^'D^b n-^n^ n::b :p-)t nt V3?""*^")S is idvv r^n ..... ...J.,. ^ .. ^ - .._, . . -. ^ ... ^ ^ 1- - v c ^ -'.r ). :- ^ : 4 26 PART 111. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. VIII. The original institution of the Sabbath ; Gen. II. 1 3. D"^nV^^ 'IIHII tnp^ nrpN inDN^^_:q'-^^. ^rq-^sn s -^:q nnD in ^d irji< uD^nit'l '^'^?n cr-nij. IX. The formation of man, and the condition in which he was at first placed ; Gen. II. 7 17. rn^b tzJiwvn '^n';i tz'^^^.n npp3 rsisjn nstl Y:^i ^n^^^b nroi nfi<-in':) inns v:?-^3 nt^iw^n- "i^ n3?n-)&^b n^ni niE^ n-i^'i pn-nx nipzinb I'li'n nvj iVinn n.^jn Dri_n tnnin a-jj-iiDwv nb'^inn 12 sv'^n '^5?'^nnn inam nrjD.vi ni2ip 'ribnn .v^n ^p^n -pn ^nn3'i nnv\n"nv>^ u'^n'h^ nin^ np^i tniD 15 DVJ r!::?^n r>"^i r^^wvn Vd&^ pn-r:? ^btj nbw^^b n } mrin nin ^sm rh-i^^ nrs '^b ^352:0 ^D.xn ^b ;?ni PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. 27 , I i - i < i _ - . , fc X. The formation of woman ; Gen. II. 18 25. r\iih trmi n'rn nVj-wN^b G'^n'VNj^ r(^T\\ ''^m^^ n nintb n'^^i^ ^^ip^i tirjtj i^^n n^n tisD D^^^n 20 niD^'i I'^niJ^^tj r\n^ np^i id^^i a^xrr^::? n^'^nn np.^i^l tDnwvn-b>^. n.vn'jii n-^'^!^ n^fi^rrp, np_^ 23 ifci^i irirbwyi ci^jn D^isn?. Ln;?d -^^n;;! timv 25 It j XL Temptation and fall of the first parents of the human race ; Gen. III. 17. TiW ^m nT^n n^n b's^ t^^^v rr^n tinsni 1 ^ Axx - V jx It V )- 'It ~ 1 ) ( : 1 - - I 1 . ->.-; I .' X -i. . . I" f(x J I- ) ; * p-into ,-ihs cAn 38 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. ?no\V^-D^ iriim ^^wsim -inEtD npni b-^DtonV pn XII. Tna/ and condemnation of the saine^ for their Jirst offence', Gen. III. 819. ^^^^ 'h^:? nnri: im* riip.^cn niw^n nn^&i^i ^.<5^'? ^^ ^:wy^"03n dnsn niswyn nriwv'm rr^-jrip n^irn^: r]'^^h nn\vi trp'n ^n'^-^s ^iDwvn n::?i *nVn ^jm-^5? 15 TO-iT vn^ ri^T 1^3^ ntDwvn I'^n^ nra rr^-OwN^ \ ui:2 "^nVn n:2:^2 ^nni ^j.inis:? ns-).^ n^^^nn nbsj inn^n?n nnn5-r T -r T 1 L" ~ : ; ~ rm ^''tpn ninn Tini^ n^j? rr\m inht nni^ Pi;n:s3 nnrin nn|^ "b,5?i3b^^ ^?^.55n n^s^-^vvi r -r T -I - I V T T - J ' ~ .V T - V T T Is T t' : ) ' ";r \y i* 30 PART III. 8ELBCT PASSAGES OP PROSE. "^tin^ bhi2 n-'DZ) ^nri3^ nts'i&^n to^n Vs^ hd^^dV tn';2:r 12 u^ri'^i^im n^2: ntiw>^ bb3 ri3 XV. JEnfrance into the ark^ and prevalence of the flood ; Gen. VII. 724. '^n';i nnnsD ^^tii^ri ns^vi nin Dinn niD']3?:q 12 nan tnnnn-^^^ njni i^on-^tdD vy-di^m rii niriw>^') 14 torinn-biDi n:/^^. h^n.-in-^iDi rifth^ n^nn-^51 Vs inD^a^ qirn-ViDi ^n^^^a^ vift^n-^::? to^ohn : AT - V -( V ) T- i|T T "^ ) )^ * PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 31 ^3?^ D-ini nnn-nfi< ^>^';2n D'^^n ^2i'i v'^^n 'n^jni V'^^'^i^"^^ ^^^ ^21^1 n^an n^:^^! t v*)^n i8 -^? ni^t) nktj ^nn^ cjbni t D';2sn '^p.s:-!:^? nnnn 19 Ynwvn-^3? ti^i^n nsV'i :n::n3 ini i^rJKi -n3 24 XVI. Abatement of the flood. Noah and his family quit the ark; Gen. VIII. 120. "^3? nn D'^n'VN? nb?.n nzris nriw>? ntp.^^ n'qnan nisn^^i Dinn rirj't3 n30*"i tn^^^asr^s';!:'^! V"i^n 2 f . :" : -::"" -it*- )t f t- i v t a^iDn ^nd^i ja^^isn-i^ Q^^'^n is^Vs^i n^^^-^n 3 nikpti CD^isn non^i nitdi fh^i vi&^n ^:?n . . . - V -" - T - -^T- \ J- J ) -: J-r V ; -; ,T h* -: IT V -J - c ~ #- -r 32 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. n'l^ D'^^s-iwv Yj>5 ^h^y ^''"jnn '''irJ.&<'i vsnD tiihb e ^:^ri^ u^izji nkDn^i? nrai i^is^ ^^2:^,1 n;p;;;?rrnwSi. ~ T X ~ -r J It I ; IT T -; IT / r < " * . -K^ rVwx nnj< &inn nnp^i i"i^ n^Dn vn^^n-^r) &'^53n ^Vp-"^3 ni :?n^i n^^ss aiD n^-nVs? nsni C~ ~ )"" ' ~ -J.. T ^' ; l_iT T (- ; ) J rr i CT 1 )T :iT I : t - ^birin ihni j ni^^wvn '^ds ^dih nsni .xi'^i n^nn 14 nninn-i^Q i^s j nb&^^ ni-Vi^ n^n^s^ nsi'^i le - r -r ' (T 'CV r : ' J-.' T 5 I ... . ^ - , I V -r T J . IT : '^T -:- I -.'tT T - > i^ tenn ^b ai7n-!:5i 'diann-^s n^nn-^s tinfi^ 19 -" C ' T ; .. T T T ~ r -r I } nataa n'!;;' !?y'i ninain awn PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. 33 XVII. 7%c building of Babel^ and the confusion of languages ; Gen. XI. 19. 'in'i'i n3?D"d V'^^'^s J^>T=^ ^xiirti^i cip^ c^^dds V^SD-iE Dd ^Db-nt-::?M D^^'JDn rd^Ni-ii ^^:i^*^ T3?n-nw>{ ni<-ib riin^ "ri^i tvni^n-^iD '^^s-^:? 5 nVrs>^V tz:bnn jiti tzVs^ hn^^ nstoi ^n^v t::' xr-r I -:* r riT ). -; j v j x i x-; )- f r : ' - V -: \x X r ex )x ;|T : x ;i" Y^wyn-^r) ^DE-^3? ctD^ cni^ nirr^ Vs'^1 {in;?n s -T v; I VAX T X -"" : (f : - ^ ix I VlT T (; : XVIII. The calling of Abraham, and the first promise made to him; Gen. XII. 14. X :!t-:!- ,t X ; (. .i-. '^.; fx ; - -:j- ' ; -.'-jx -:|- x nV^i niJi'^ i'^^i^^ nin'i n-djs^-) nnn.v ih^^ tn^^vvn 4 t=i y^ap 34 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. XIX. The second promise made to Abraham, while residifig at Mamre; Gen. XV. 16. \^-]nn-n^ nin;; ^^h^nj nnnNi n^.i^^i t ini^. n^in 2 P'lD^^ ^^'^^ ^n^'S pcdn-p^ ^ins? 'nVin ^::3!^i trip^is ft nndn^i nirr^s i:Q&{m :^nT e mtt : c T)v: : ^T |- fc';;iv: /iv j- cv :i' XX. The third promise made to Abraham, at Mamre; Gen. XVII. 18. nin^. wxVi n;;rd ;pdri nrd a'^rdn-'j!?, Dinist ^n-^i i nini^i tr^^m ^^'^iD ^nnn riDn.vi jn^^n n^ni 2 nisl'^i l^3E-V5? t=:'nn&^ t?s^i tni^^ l^^^in ^n^^^ 3 ^b ni'^nb t:Vi3? n^nnb nnnnb ri'^nnvv !n::?nT ^nt^^ r^^ '>nn2i jinnnwv ^riiJ^no^ a'^iT^vb s ' : I ': -* -It : f iv-: j- c'"s :" : i r PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 35 XXI. Abraham offering up his son ; Gen. XXII. 1 19. ^5? nVi?^ dd w^::?ni nntn v^ws-^^^ '^^'"'^^'i t)n-)2fi< tsiD^it !^l'^^^{ n^x nCwN^ ti2*^inn nn^^ s i^-nN:T t^'^ih'Visj DJinnu^ ntJwN^^i t nbipb njsn s -!:wv ^liih^^i 'i^^jn:: ^n^P.P ''^v^ ^?^. "r?'^. ^?.'^ ^ T X ; ~ -TT 1 .' '- . v; It - -(T ->.' 'i t T ~ Vd2 pn:s^-n^ np>*-i c^2::?r-nwH 'rihs^^i niT:sn-nx I Dnnn^^ -iriwS'i D^/rirni2 n^rr^ "i.^trtJ I'^sv i^np-i n -t T V < ^r " J T : 1^- J T T* : -" 86 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. iS^nn Dip^:an-a-d nnnnw^ 5^n|V'i Ji32 nnn nVs?^, u \ Hw^T nin^ nn^ ci^n 112^^"^ VdwV nw>^"i*^ 1 nin*^ {C^^^n-j^ n^rd annns^-^i^ nin^ ^w>^b^ ^^ip^i 15 J T - ' ( S' T : - V (T : ' )- r - s^'j-- ^DiDiiDD :inT-n^i ns-)v>{ nnnm ^:Dn3&^ Tiin-'^s n ^^Qg^l I'^y^r^wV ^^I'P,^. ^p^t^ J'^^P^. rilP^^ nt?.^, 19 XXII. Appearance of Jehovah to Jacob; Gen. XXXV. 9 15. JVC.:- ^-: '-- ; c : < -:r v ../v; ^ ..- ^^wD j^-ip-^-wXp npr nn-o c^n^w^^i^-nrjj^^i nn^ 10 -riw^ fi^np^i ^t]-:D n^n^ V&^n\r'^-Dw>^ "^s np>*^ w !n^2:^nt3 n^::bt]i rr^^r) rr^n'^ C'^i:; ^npT ^ir; nfini * c : : :':-: :/- ;-; i . t -r vj c . ^J'-^T :Vitvn-nw>^ irs^ ri'^nn^^ ^n^^nT^^ n::nwv rh 13 np:?'^ ns'i tinw^ n::'^ i^wv nip^s D'^n'V&^ rb3?r3 h lr. .^"r VJV - J . jv . V -; 'j - -r - PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. 37 ad-n^v npr i^Spn tpti n-h^ pss^n Wd h*^^::? 15 t^wS-n^s u^n'b^ n-ii invy 12^ TJ3^i cip^n XXIII. Birth, education, andjlight of Moses ; Ex. II. 1 -15. nnni t ^^^-nii-nwv np'=^i "^ib m'^s^ td^v i^^^^ 2 -nij ns t:';2:ni ns:Tn^ ip^nn n'lt^nni j^riS nnn in'ni^ nsnni nK^'^n nst-V^? aiD^i ni^ni iV^n 4 i^nni nL>^^n T^-^;? nb^n n^n'n3?:i iw>^*'^n-^3? mib T ) 't (T -r -; , ; ; ' ' -I ; t . -I ^ V ->- ^i. J- ; IT y :- ' V - T X in npb'^n n"u3w>^ Tib Mws^ipi 'nVwvn nns-ns-!:.^ tib^n Q.^-fivV .y-^pm n)bV:pn 'ribni ^id^ nns ^ -.'IT - ) V c-^' : T : - IT ' V - -h" c : - jt 'IT >)-- 'Vt ; V f-j" . c* ":r '- : -bx i^"!;^} npn V^.:;^.! nnn nrrsnn'^j '^^^'^P'^. ^^ -ffl\>5 ns^ '^12:^ l3\v w>J"):ii Dn"V:i02 x'l^.i I'^rjfi^. ^^1 iD\y iw-'^s wHi'i riii rib is^i ti^^nx^a '^"^^3? 12 npni ^D'jpn n'l^^ fiis'^i t Vins ^no^/^^i n2:3ri-ni< 13 38 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. "nw>^ rij^ns 3?t)-d-i tnn'^n 3?iid p&^ "itwx^i ntDti 15 trn^-riw^n n-ib^i rins ^:e^ 'IT : I VI. : V ) : - j" ; XXIV. Appearance of Jehovah to Moses, in the burning bush ; Ex. III. 16. *?jinn rJwN^-nsVs rbwv nin*^ Tiwv^n w\n^i tnnnn 2 ^Drx ?i3DnT tijw^s njps rijon nsni ^^Tl riDon n^^i^i nion Ti'inti D^nVwV vh^^ u\np^i n%>^nb no n^n3? ririw^ ntd^^ Dhp^n '^s ti'^V:;-) ^:?t3 :nV":::?D-Vj3 !^^i^^ ^nS^ '^:d3w>^ ^m'^i t^^in d"ip-nnnw>^ i^l^j? 6 I T -1 :; 'It I v'f ~ ; ** T X XXV. Commission of Moses, respecting the oppressed Israelites ; Ex. VI. 1 II. ''nd ^J<2 np:r'^-%vi pns-^-K^^ cnnn^v-bft^ nij^i 2 nwH DwV^ 13?33 V")^"*1^^ Dnb ^^"^^ Q^^^ ^*"T^"^^ PART in. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 31> D'^'jDpn'^ n^rjq :^nT3 dshwN^, '^^^.^.^l ti2n'i2>^^. pni^b ur\i2^b rinwV r\r\b ^^'I'^-n^^ '^n^^taD niDwS* lr"r;*j '^tx; j _ix 't ".' -r -r ^ :' ~l y.' V CT : y ~ :~ it '-r - nhn^Di nsbrra !?::^^-^j 1 '^s ns'^nns NS^D^i^b -ivxto *Y>^^ nnnsnn n?^ bk;yq'^^ '^y.^. ^'iHn "^.?J?1 nnVfi^ nt3w>i^i bw>^n;::'^ ^dpt-^d^ TOn wvnp^i tni:s:a 21 A-.-' ; V -- ( X ;. }'; X : jv )T>:'- , - '.rxo'Bri rjn^i nri'^nhsrit:^ 7w>^*2S did':* ^hp^ ^5m 'T ~ ^ ) ": 1" : cv I : : : ' 3 r.' t N : i* piDin Tdw>^ n^rrp n'nr^an '^nti-^^vN^i fiip-d^^n-VN^ 40 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. D>^n tp^n ^'^:2n ^rns-nwNt_i nn^tj-nx 1^532 nb-'Vri '^sns nrr'i \Si:^v p nrwyi ntrin-ni^ 29 hiPis ibs^ nn:^:^ V"^^'^ ni::^-^:: nsn rin^i iisn n'^n-j np.w>? '^n^pn ni^si ijp V^cs-^? M;n ^sn*;!)-' '^DS-n^ czn^^-Dr^ '^^>"nin^ '^vns -ri v n^^<^i "^s vi^^rrin ^rk'^b nfi^b nipn-!::? dnst: ptnn 33 J* 1 (St t ' -^ T ; - ; _j .. - t t - ';-.; I". XXVII. The ten comjnandments ; Ex. XX. 1 17. ( IT I vc" T ) T r T j" v; _.-:- n^A"T 2 * PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 41 r]^::ii2 t2n2:n vnis^ rpn^sin ntiwv ^^n'^^ nin-^ -fi<^ { vi&^b nnrii2 D^ns i;ri&^i nnn:a V"^^i pi^ote^ a^:psn e J IT : lD>n D'^x:^ nonD t impb na^n nr-ni ni5T 9. e -iT J- (T - ... - . ;,..._. ^ .^ J . T , ' / ; . -.T - T T ; -r JV-; |- J 7 ^V : ^5 t^n.:^p:n im ^n^.i ^^.^nni ^H?^.?- "H-i'^^^ I V T T V '-l-T - V J T T 'T V V tintiiP'^i n:n;sjn ah^-n.H nin^ Tina p'-b^? 'fT 'y ' cv '^ v; 3-r : V -; t t -:-.t I : c \^piD IP ^nn n3:?n-^it? le \^:s>ib im Vdi niani niuii iniawxi I'nDxi 6 ^ PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. XXVIII. Renewal of the same ; Ex. XXXIV. 48. ris^n^l "jbs nin'; n.-in tc'jz.v nnb ^3p its 5 V3S-^3? I nin"^ i'n3'"^i jnin'^ 0^32 &(np*i cti 1123? tD-'S^w^^ 'niwy :^3ni cini ^&^ nln*^ 1 nin*' i^^np'-i 113? fiiiDD cz]"^i:bN*b Son is: tn^&^i lon-nni 7 -^3? nih^v ivj I "IPS npr wsb hpsi niini nirr^ s t nriwv DTI ";ns.v n>Tr!:D ^:e-!:3?i "iDip^i XXX. TAfi blessing to be pronounced by the priests upon the people of Israel ; Num. VI. 22 27. jnn^ ni^i^ bi^y^-^ '^:s-ni&^ iDinn nb ib'fi^^ v:':i PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 43 ^-bi^ VDS I nirr^ niV^ t^nn-::'^! nin'^ rpin-^ 25.24 jniDin^v ^:wyi ^i^i*;i3"^ ^^j^-bT ^!aiD-n&^ ^riiDi 27 XXXI. Destruction of Korah, Dathan^ and Abiram; Num. XVI. 2335. IxJt It "JJ" ' )T T ~' i J * J T l" ^T~Sn..T;iT .. T -1 *. T**>T .*" c T . I V ^v T --; T r ( : r : v t t ; it CT -:i 1 )x T -'i ' ~ J * > Ti'"" Ft ~ T J V r: IT ~V^ ' -r -* ;|T T ~;i"" ' t t ; K' -r pi'in n^^*^ n^i3 n^o.^i^i tDSDi an'^pn^ Qri.'^??^^ 28 ...\.. T , : J T / -;|- -t; -"t : r * It T ; fx J ) SV "; <.. T' X T-iT T "''. r n^b-ni^ ntnj^n nnssi riirr^ wxin*^ nws*^-)S-n.>^i 30 X -^x X -. IT X r It X ; -' : * : * : rh'^t n^^n ^ti'^i tj;ib ntD^^-b^-'nwV1 ariwv n5?bn'^ T s : f ~ ) riT ; v x j-. -: x v j x >^x ;it ;j- (t : '." Vf* It ) X "; it J ~:i' V ; I* fx X -; It )'~ X - VA" X C * "^ ! ~ * "" ** ~ ! ~ J f. ; - ; J.: X X n X ; Av it r -t X k; f - jv X >V~; x; ) ^ ; - I ; It t -^31 tSnpn "^in^ ^id&^*^i viw^n an^^j' diddi S4. X : .t'x - ' ) ( ; l~ I X X V -; -;- ;- I V : it -> Ax> : -"T {V I : j-.-i . x ; .- 44 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. n.v ^D&irn nin*^ riwVt) n.ss"> zixi tr^^n '^:^b2t\ 56- V i': - t" '; - - 't- i r XXXII. Water brought from the rock, by Moses^for the chil- dren of Israel ; Num. XX. 7 11. -p D'^b cinb hi<2ini I'^XD'^t) 7n3i nn^j^:?^ 5?^Dn Di'i tn^n nD^wy'i2i3nTn:?^DrT"i!Dnnni2n&^3- n ^.S2^i n'^t:5?s ^n^^n :fbzrrr\i< '^^1 it^-dw^^ nM }DT:pn^ nrjr^ n;DrTi t3^sn a^^ XXXIII. Exhortation to love God^ to obey his statutes, and to inculcate them on the rising generation ; Deut. VI. 4 9, 13, 17, 18. ^nnd:i Ds nisni ^'^b^ Dn^Ddi { ^nnn^-^:? ni^n 7 ' r. T ; 'rV y.. : - tipntsn 1'adn^ wn in&^i ^^-)^n ^^n'^&^ nin^-ni^ is /r^^ or THE -^ PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. \:s^ ^ 45 niiT^ *^3*^5?3 nr^m niri^n n*^'^:?! n^s: nti&^ i^ni la 'XXXIV. Death and burial of Moses ; Deut. XXXIV. 1 -8. ^nr!:? nb\v^ 21:5''^^'^ pns^^ i=ninuv^b '^n::?:n'i3 nn'^1 ni>^n fi<^ n^atrii !n^^5?n ri^^nwin n3Dn^^ 5 tnin^ *^-b3? 2^Si2 vi^^^ nirr^-nns? ntri^ n^' IT : r - (-r ) vy.- : jt : ^ nv r.- ^ t -]a nm^ tmn ni^^n n:^ inngp-nisj. 'j:\s sj-i^ 7 tn;ri^ bnj^ -^rin '^n^ ^tv\^^ ai*^ D'^tribD XXXV. Passage of the river Jordan^ by the children of Israel ; Josh. III. 917. -riM vMi n3n i^^bjNtnto'; *'};^'h^^ ??"''^? '^P.^'^'l ^ jii'nn nwVTm j'lBin'^ nt^is^i t cri'^n V^v niri"^ ^in'^ 10 V ^.. .. . . .. ... : V... .1. . ,- ^ y. ,. -n^^'^ ^nsn-ni^i ^inn-nwN^i "^nnn-nvvi ^^y^'D'n ' ('S r ~ ' J"; ( ; ~: < v; it; t ; " 46 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. -c:'^^? 'THfi^-'oi'^i^? ^ji^^w^ '^f?.^?^ ^"'h *^?.^ I^P nn^n ^^j n-T^n ^ra \nwvn-V3 ii"^^^ ^''1"*' V'^^ t^ni^ 13 n'Q:?^^ nV3?!]^r3 Q'^nrn s^/sn i^nis'^ Q^irism il^n-n-nwv nb.?V nn;VriN^t n>;n ?bD3 '^h';i u n:sps -ibsDs I'lnwvn ^^i^b'D o'^^risn ^V,nni T^-i^ri-l:^ c^^iTHi inns "1213 Tii:5< Ti^^n ni^n "in^ phnn -nns linw^jn \N5';r)*3 n'^SniDn 'I'lt]^?,!! tinn*; "i^o.n XXXVI. T%e 5un and moon arrested in their course ; Josh. X. 1214. ni'^i M'kSn ni^i t |ib\>^ p!a3?3 nn^i ni*^ Vi::?r:iS 13 r^yn^^ r^jph N^nn ni^s n;;n wvVi :D'^^,n nrD u tbi^n'iD'^b nn^2 nin*^ ^s 'd\x Vips nin*^ irb-j^V V. 16. p tnjijfl. PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. 47 XXXVII. Victory of Deborah and Barak; Judg. IV. 1324. >.-'" ' '' " . -'c^"^ '; ' ) /"'s ^: "^ ^ .' Di^n nr '^s Qv P"i^"7>^ "nln^^ n^Dwvni tiiiD'^p 14 ^s'^ n'\Ti'' ^bt] !nr3 kno^D-ni^ nin*^ rn: hm tD^i^ D^Db5^ niir)::?i nhnn nnt) p2i ^^^1 'h'^ds^ .' (*.* T T .* ; J I* *' J T -J T lT~i J t^^n^ t^^^r^n nnn n^s r!i^ nnn-^^^ rn'^ ris is rh^o ^3'n^^ rrr^D t^Vvv n^^in1 fiinD^D nwvip^ ^> t n^'^ti/^Ds "inoDni nbnwsn n^V^N^. "^H.tl iTn-Kv ^ht^^ nn^^i 'TiVwvd'i fi^n*^ ^^K-nw\ n^ni !:n.Nn nns ^bv *":'; T "^ : VAX -jv (~: Yiw>^2 nnni inpns nn^n-n^^ ;:?pnni -Ow^Vs r^fi< -n.s oYn pin n^ni tnb^i m*t n^n3-^5'^m 22 njni n^VwH wvn^i tip^^q Jins^-- 12^55 tD\^n-imi>^. * T. 18. -lV T. 19. K -lon 48 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. XXXVIII. Death of Sampson ; Judg. XVI. 2331. nwv i:t^ ^rnVwV in: "rirjii'i nnt^tD^^ nn'^rib&^ t'^3'^^^n-n&< nnnn tj^.^i mi^x nnnr) h^^'^ -pnto'^1 iitzJntD!:^ ii>{np '^i^&i^i nsV nro'^^ ^rr^i 25 ... F^ ^ .^ ... - |. -^^ F J.. ( )--:r- 5Dn^^:p p-iS&ii Dn-^'^s? iir:D n^in 'ititi u'^^ii^Tn n\vhn?Ti3.xi^\vD'^Db5< n:DV::s xHn-V::?i n^-^ti^D ntn D:?sn *7i&^ jj^3 "'^ic.^ni ^\ ^^.^?X ^1^.!! I^^T^ td^n-^Vs^ "^r:? ^niist] nn&^-i:;^ n^p3w>^i D^^rrV^^n n*^an Tiiwy 'ninn 11^52:; ( -^riri-nwy -ir^^^ nsf^^'i ^^ nnwHi iD'^ti'^3 iHus nn-^Ss? ^^o^i nn'^br ii^^ T. 25. p iitsD ib. p Di^iiOKn T. 26. p ,i3''ttni iv. 26. Bn .Hn PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. 4^ ^.vnia-^-nvv '0iD wsini 1*^2^^ ni:^ inpiD yiwsntd&^ XXXIX. The calling of Samuel; 1 Sam. III. 114. inn "^b^J ^:^b nin^-nwv nitirj b^^i2iD n;?3m i nin5 iVnn ir?i itjipns nDta' ^b.i ^^inn ni^n 'i':?^i 2^6 n^i^ ^Hwsnp-wH^ ni^&i^i ^V ni^ip-^s ^:3n At : V ->-T .(. It - ; r ' )-r r -fiinp nin^ ao'^i t nin'^-- in^ i^Vw>^ nV,^-^ d"Ji s ^3 "^D3n l^.wV^I *^tJ3?-!pwV 'Ti'::_^^^i Dp/4rip^V?2^'i:^.^52'ip ^^:s? n^ai^i tn3?3^ j^np nin^ *^:d -^Vs? p^i "^V Pwvnp 9 ^j... V - -,T - ... (T^ ; r '.--.r- .. T ,,It nzp^l !:.\^52d ij.^^^^i ^;^d:? ?r);^ ^3 nin*] ni'i D?n-D?D3 vv-)p^i ni^n^i hirr; fi^b^^i ri^aipipn 10 ?tib' ^s ni*! Vi^.^^i? ntj>>^tl ^Nt^'^^d 1 ^jst.n^p niD> "^rDbwX nsn bw^^^iri-^wNi nin*' -i^wv^i tn'^n::? n It T y ; T rV ; ; J T . ": ^ ' ' : ^^ '^nns'^ ntD.^5-^ n^ ^V?-!?fi<. d*^;;.^^ Iv^nn dVs 12 T. 2. p ra^j^i 7 50 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE. '^b:? n^nb ^n3?:ndD pbi j D3 nniD &i^i i^^b tzn^ h It - c^ : ; - )V : j" i- r r; .. - . XL. Cornbat of David with Goliath ; 1 Sam. XVII. 38 51. D^^nn ^^D2i Gnx n*"S^i ^nDn-jt] 1 nr3nNf ]j?.^n "^nTD^i ni'^-Di^ ?i>^-i'^i ^niD'^s-n -021*1 ir^s^nnn 42 ^r.tb^En n:2wNi*i t I'^nVvs "n*n-nws^ ^n^^bsn bVp^i 44 nnij^ ^hipbBtr-b^, hTi nt],wv;:i t rutjn ripn^b^ 45 :]^n3ni '^^;^2 nirr; rp.nD'; in'^n ai;;?! triDin 46 Yiw^n n^n^i n^^tD^sn PiI^p n-^n n'vn C'^ntiVD V. 45. b"&3 hr-a PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE AND POETRY. 51 p^Di 5?^p:n '^niD^sn-p "ith ptn^i tns-)w>^ i^de 50 1p^^n-ni^. j^s-nn:q^i ^^nnn^^'^^i t^imti^ ^pbjp^^ XLI. Hallelujah Psalm ; Ps. CL. v^l}J^ b^:''\bbti 52 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRY. XLII. Exhortation to bless God; Ps. 134. nin^ "^"in::?-^!) nirp -n^^ 1S13 f nan i IT : IT I VITT 'J-T XLIII. Exhortation to praise God; Ps. 117. D'^iri-Vs niri'^ -n&^ ^Vbn i f IT X J - It : r XLIV. God our benefactor ; Ps. 113. I tn*^ ^b^n 1 nin*^ ^I^n3? ^VVn /Ax . jx r -i.' ^'t It : X - At : ) X - x( FART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRY. jfii IT : r XLV. God merciful and faithful ; Ps. 103i nin'^-Dit ''BS3 'SIS 2 ''Djip-^sb nVon 3 '^?.'J!n nnjs^^ Vjstisn 4 ^4 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. ntph i^jDn"! r^i*^ 7 nirr; ii:m c^,ni s C'^^rs-^:? SK cnn^ 13 n%^n'^-^3? tiiti^ en-) ^V ; J T ;iT ~ J "^^ ton Its 5?^ I'^'^pD niDt^T PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRY. 55 1^ . . ( J. .. . - ^ -f , . ^ , . ^.. - ^ .. ^. inn's Vips ::?r)dV XL VI. God our Creator; Ps. 100. ; . . -r -r T - ). ^ r iSt -J J ; T T( J i'lDH t3Vi3?'^ nin*^ niD-'^3 5 56 PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. XLVII. God the mighty King; Ps. 93. Q2^ r\M^:)< ibi2 nin^ i nin"; i ninn: ^s^te: 3 IT : T - T J ( IT : _. . - ^ ,. - "I'M ^3tixD I n^riJ? 5 t a^ti^ '?ini - \ n-^a;; nVs nnn 'oit:ni 1^52*^52 'ii^n" itn"^ 4 K" " - ; :v -J .IV t np3 niDS^ c^n'bw^^ niTr ni::^^)^ rjt3 c^i:* ^tsn 7 tY>s :\'it]n i'^ips ]n3 tn^D npj'"^ ^nbi^ ^:V n^t^tj J V (T X -> r X .' -: 1 vjT T v ; - XT':-- n'^DH rspi ns-^^ n-dp J V"l^^s n^'i^'^ ^"^^'' Q^"^^ I VIT -r i -r - ) -f PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRY. 56 C L. God who wields the thunder and lightning / Ps. 29. r:^hb^ "^33 n'ln'^^ inn i S J.. . -r -C -J T t Ti?i lins riin*^:? "inn IT ) - T - ) -r - - ) : ' I K . T -: - ^T re '-* nsitj ^"^n"^ nin*^ bip e tm^P 131^ riin^"^ b'^n'^ J t; I , v:iv- \th'\:>b 'Tjbn riirr^ did^i IT- -* - v w *: "^ ? 56 d PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF POETRY. LI. The Lord mr Shepherd; Ps. 23. r -;r: - : c** t^D^sHD*^ ran ?iri::?:D^') ^iDDtd ix -:r: -r-i" '.:-: 3' : t n*^in *^Dis *^i)vH-) ptsD n^iiD^ LII. The King of glory; Ps. 24. t t "^ J " JC T ; T )- : '-p : ^ in^^iD::?-^;? nnsni q'lcn ipsn ^23?2i!: 14 ^DiT^S:? nl^Q'^D ^DHM 15 ^, . . ^ . .. .-c It T ) T r PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRY. 56 k ^o'^!::? nD:i3 irr nto3?t3i LVIII. The evils of intemperance ; Prov. 23 : 29 35^ I 0*^3 TO '^ri^^ '^ibvv ^'nh m *^^h 29 \ "^iD^qt; -)ipn!? n\^:n^ niD'^ trims irr^in.y 32 nnt n^^n"^ ^^r:? 33 AT V : -" : T T -c ;^n rifiins nib'qn ^n^'^n-^n "^a^sn 35 ; )T T - . T -: nh5? ^3trip:ix pi'^DiK 56 I PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRT. LIX. Divine admonition in the visions of the night ; Job 4: 1221. ns:^'^ nn'n ^b^i 12 tW3t3 v^^ ^3TJ^ npni "^ntos rn?*t? n|Dn ^T ., ...->v : T ;c t;:?^iDfi^ ^lpi HM'^ rr 3- : I" 1^^^^^ i^b i"^in::?s in is ' ^ -:r -> "re 'J** T r: It >, t t ; - ; n^n-'^nm '^DDto' a&^ 19 it : I '^~ iSt : 5T Ti.- -.-: IT : : ~ : ^n s*^ Dn::?t? npint: 20 AT... vvtc '.- t^n'zii'^ n:s3^ n^'^sb ^^sia ,.. -J... T . .. J. . . om Dnn^ 7D3-^ibn 21 AT _iT -- I -: PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OF PROSE. 66 1 SELECTION FROt THJJ ]?ABABLES OF THE OLD TESTAMENT. LX. Parable addressed by Nathan to David ; 2 Sam. 1^: 17. t m^ iHwHi n'^is^ nn&^ T\m ^^^^ ^n w^ii:^^ '^stri i Vs-rij^ -dnbi \ii^i2 n^nn npm 7^:2 n'^n 'I'^mh 2 3 hntin iDStii ^Dfiin I2n^ i^n*^ ^3:2-0:71 it:^' d\y^ ibfi iin^i tnns iV-^^nm nsisn ip'^nn^ 4 np.j^S nVt;?b i'^l^s^^ mii2 nnjP_^ ^ian^i 'Tp3?n ; I 3'.' It C* "^ V T V - T ; tx nn'^n-HK W^'^ "im npi^ D'^ns^snwy nV'^ri'^ ntonsn - T T .' T T ^.' -: /v.* 'iSt ; ~ ~ _!'- ; ( I ~ JT ( T V 'jT-r V l~ It T 1 JV -; (*" : V LXI. Parable ofJotham ; Judg. 9 : 620. w^tD^i a^n^-nn tri&inn nb?jii i]b^,i "oi^S^h ^i^ji^ 7 n^wvi'1 \^vbv n::ibt3 nn!^ in^isi^i 'nV^Q t^r-^^h^ 9 ^iiSiiD'] *^"niriNi. ''ipT^"'^'?. ''^^.lO-V^. ^'!i^ ^rj.^ 56 n PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP PROSE AND POETRY. ')1t)^^n J L^:^itr'hy y^:h '^niD^m D^'iri^wvi n^rib^^ lo trh n^^im \^Th^ '^ri^ti dx-^d'^ nDwvn^ D'^sipn n ^nb^^nn isin dn^ '^^^^^_ t'^r't?,:^ ^51^^^ n^y-'^Db is :p^3b ^niDbrn D'^tDD&^i ti^n'^fi^ n:a';23t3n '^'j:iTn-n&^ jiDK 'Tib ^r:i^n-b&^ n^2::pn-'b5 i-in&i^i t Q*'S3?n-b^ 14 ^^sn '^DH ^fiis ni'^'hT rhi2b ^m n^hti2 cn&i \ p3nVn LXII. Parable of the vineyard ; Is. 5: 1 7. pnt2 '^inrL^^i ^n^pO"^.! "^np.^ri 2 I* -. : ~) (''" ) ~'r 5'-:- ' *." ' ) * ' tQ'iC5&^3 ';i)3?^i n^333? niiD5?b ^^n-^lp ;:?1TO '.' ? V* -T T I* T ~ J n:?nb rr^ni inr)ito:D ion PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRY. 56 t m'\i2b n^m i-^i!\ yhD rr^rii n^ari nh^'i LXIII. Parage of the vine ; Ps. 80 : 920. n^3S^ rr^DS 10 n^S Dnn IDS 11 tj*^-";:? n'^i'^sp nVtsn 12 nil '^i^jj-^iD nTiw>^i VlT J T r -r . 56 Jp PART III. SELECT PASSAGES OP POETRY. V-* : - - ' : iTc i: ' IT T ;)- T T F V - ifi^ip3 rj^tini ^3'^'^nh It' : y r ; * ~ : I3n;pn nixn^s nvi'S^. n.l^'] 20 T I" T J / V T y T PART I. NOTES. The object proposed by the followins^ selections of Hebrew words in Part 1., is, to furnish the student with examples, in order to aid him in the practice of declining, both viva voce and by wri- ting out, the various forms of words as made by conjugation, de- clension, etc. If learner and teacher will have the patience to go through with all these, in regular course, they may be assured that a more radical knowledge of grammatical forms will be ob- tained, in this way, than can be done by reading over the Hebrew grammar and simply committing it to memory, for almost any limited period of time which can be named. It is not intended, however, that Praxis in this way should, at the outset, be the sole and exclusive occupation of the student, for any considerable length of time. A few lessons, devoted entirely to it, will impart a facility of pursuing it, which will make it af- terwards more of a pleasure than of a toil. After such lessons, the student can begin with the study of Part II., and proceed on regularly. In the mean time, however, as soon as he begins to make some progress in Part II., one paradigm at least, under some one of Nos. I XXXVII. Part I., should be either written out, or recited viva voce, as often as he recites a lesson in Part II. It is best, by all means, to write out Paradigms, at least one half of the time employed in the exercises on Part 1. It will be useful, for the other half, to recite them vivd voce. This will accomplish two objects at the same time ; it will impart a facility in Hebrew chirograph}/^ (which is altogether desirable) ; and it will train the mind of the student to habits of nice grammatical and orthographi- 8 58 PART I. NOTES ON NO. I. cal accuracy, which cannot be acquired equally well in any other way. But the student need not write out all his paradigms fully. Of some, he may make skeletons ; writing out only the 3d persons singular and plural of the Praeter and Future, with the Inf, Imp., and Participles. But let him also write out many paradigms /?/%. And where there is a class, and the instructer attends to them all at the same time, the correction of one exemplar, which exhil>its a written paradigm, (if the correction be made viva voce and in presence of the class), will of course serve for the paradigms of all the class ; as they can be required each one to correct his own paradigm, while in the lecture room, agreeably to the directions of the instructer. 1 would earnestly recommend to all teachers and learners, who make use of this Chrestomathy, to pursue the method here pointed out. Experience has long since taught me, that seemingly rapid advances, at the commencement of Hebrew study, are not to be regarded as being of course real advances. He will ulti- mately make the most rapid and sure progress, who carefully, deliberately, and with great pains-taking as to grammatical princi- ples, lays a foundation broad and deep, on which he may erect a superstructure at his will. I venture to pledge myself, that if the method above recommended be followed, neither learner nor teacher will ever see cause to regret it; nay, that both will be- come fully persuaded of its usefulness and importance. The examples in No. 1. are chosen, with much pains-tak- ing, from roots which have neither Gutturals, nor Quiescents, nor Aspirates in them, in order that the student may have as little dif- ficulty as possible to encounter, in the first stages of his praxis. A few of the examples have a final Resk ; but such a Resh usually makes no irregularity, excepting that the Future (and its cognates) of such verbs not unfrequently has a Pattahh final. But in the examples here selected, this is not the case ; and all, therefore, which are ranged under a., may be declined, in respect to their vowels, after the model ofi^Djp. Those under b. are declined after the manner of iS^ in Par. I. T of the regular verbs. There are but very ieyv verbs of this kind. PART I. NOTES ON NOS. II V. 59 In No. II., the examples under a. resemble Vr^ , be wJ , bND in Par. H. of the regular verbs. The student must resort to the Lexicon, in order to determine the forms of the respective Fu- tures, etc. The verb bfi<"^ properly belongs to verbs y Guttural ; but it was necessary to employ it here, in order to exhibit the pe- culiar forms of the 2d person plural in the Praeter of Kal. The examples under b. comprehend nearly all the verbs final Hholem^ that have three radicals in Kal Praeter. Of the last four of them, no Infinitive Future or Imperative occurs. No. 111. exhibits verbs whose ^rs^ radical is an Aspirate. In writing out the Paradigms, the student must recur to the princi- ples respecting Daghesh lene^ in 79 82. E. g. ]:i2^ , (ii^ not ^) 79. 1,* the same principle applying to a single word, which ap- plies to the beginning of a chapter or verse ; Fut. b:^:}'^ , 80. ^ (where instead of the words " simple syllahle^^'' should have been printed, vnisoel ; see the correction in the Addenda p. 235 of the Grammar.) In future references to this 80th section, this correction will be taken as understood. Imp. b73i\ etc. Niphal b?5^5, by the principle in 80. Fut. btt^*; , 78, Note 2. Piel Fut. b73i^. , 80. Pual Fut.bTar, 80. Hiphil b'^^J^n , 80. Hophalbm-, 80. Hithp. b732nn , 79. 2; and so of all the other examples in this species of verbs. No. IV. exhibits verbs with an Aspirate for the middle radi- cal. Kal Inf. ibT , 80. Fut. -13^. , 79. 2 and 81. 2, Note 2. Imp. H^t, ""npT, 80. Part. -^DT , 80. Niph. ^3t3 , 79.2. Fut. ">Dr , 80. Piel 13T ,71. also 78, Note 2. Pual ^3t , ib. Hiph. T'3Tn , 79. 2. Hoph. ^3Tn , ib. Hith. '-i^.Tnn , 71. also 78, Note 2. No. V. exhibits verbs with an Aspirate for their ^na^ radical. Kal Inf const. '^73";^ , Fut. S^sb^, Imp. I'^b , Part. 1721 b, Niph. I^'r3 , Piel I73b , Pual '173b , Hiph. T^^bii , Hoph. i^brt , Hith. iTsbnn , all according to the principle in 80, as corrected above. Also Imp. Fem. "'I^ab tim-dhlisioi ""iTab tim-di)^ 81.1. Plur. ^l^b, ibid. The same is the case in the Imp. of Nos. Vll. VIII. IX * In all references, the first number refers to section ($) in my Hebrew Grammar ; the subjoined numbere or letters, to subdivisions in the same 60 PART I. NOTES ON NOS. VI IX. which follow; e. ^. Imp. ISp , "^ICp ; IpS , "^"fps ; in3 , ""nnS, etc.; como. 81. 1. 2, and Xotes. The same principle applies, of cotirse, to all cases of the like nature. No. VI. exhihits verhs with two Aspirates for the two first ra- dicals. Kal 'OZ3 ,19. 1. and 80.* Fut. \lJ3p; , 80. and 81, xNote 2; also 79. 2. Pari. ^2^3, 79. 1 ; also 80. Niph. 'iJ'3DZ , 80; also 79. 2, comp. 81, Note 2. Fot. Jns'; , yik-kd-bhe^h^ 71. and 78, Note 2 ; also 80. Piel t;rs , 79. 1; also 71. Pual 'vj^p, ihid. Hiph. \l"^ZD-j, 80; also 79. 2. Hoph. iJspn, ibid. Hith. "i^^^nn , 79. 2; also 71. and 78, Note 2. No. V'll. exhibits verbs, with two Aspirates for the two final letters. Kal. Praet. ipb, 80. Future 'n'sb'; , 79. 2; also 80. Niph.isb: , ibid. Fut. ipV , 80. Piel isb , Pual n3b , 71 ; al- so 80. Hiph. n"'3bn , 79. 2 ; also 80. Hoph. isbn, 79. 2 ; also 80. Hiph. "^-^imri, 71 ; also 80. No. Vlll. exhibits verbs, with Aspirates for the first and third radicals. Kal Praet. 273 , 79. 1 ; also 80. Fut. nrp^ , 80. Part. nrs, 79. 1 ; also 80. Niphal ntp3, 80. Fut. ITS'; \ 71 ; also 80. Piel 373 ,79. 1 ; also 80. Pual 173, ibid. Hiph. n'73ri , 80. Hoph. ntDri , ibid. Hiph 172nn , 79. 2 ; also 80. No. IX. exhibits verbs, with Aspirates for all their radicals. There are very few of these, in the Hebrew language. Kal Praet. l.-r , 79. 1 ; also 80. Fut. dnD-. , 80 ; also 79. 2 ; also 80. Niph. 3n3: , 80 ; also 79. 2 ; also 80. Fut. Niph. nnS"; , 71 ; also 80. Piel nr3 and Pual ITO, 79. 1 ; also 71 ; also 80. Hiph. n'^RDn , 80 ; also 79. 2 ; also 80. Hoph. nn3n , ibid. Hith. IRSnrj, 80. 79. 2; also 71 ; also 80. Remark. If the student will diligently and faithfully pursue the writing off of the various paradigms with Aspirates, he will, in this way, speedily acquire a familiar knowledge, not only of the usual forms of regular verbs in general, but of all the minutiae which pertain to the mode of writing them, when they contain Aspirates, in all iheir different conjugations, moods, and tenses. * In accumulated reTerenceg like this case and others which follow, the design is, that they should answer to the various cases in wliich Daghesh iene is admitted or excluded, as the^ successively follow each other in each word. PART I. NOTES ON NOS. X XVII. 61 Nos. X. XI. XII. exhibit verbs D Guttural, S Guttural, and i Guttural, The diversities of the Future, Imperfect, etc. are to be sought for in the Lexicon. The exercises in these are very important, in respect to the attainment of a proper knowledge of the manner in which the composite Shevas are employed in the Hebrew ; and also of a knowledge of the manner in which the Gutturals affect the vowels, employed in connexion with them. No. Xlll. exhibits examples of verbs with Resh ; viz. (a) Verbs ^S. (6) Verbs n:?. (c) Verbs nb. In these it will be useful for the learner to exercise himself, so as to acquire, by experi- ence, an accurate knowledge of the various departures from re- gular analof^y, which these species of verbs exhibit. No. XIV. exhibits verbs iXO, whose iJ< is treated as a Guttural. The principles by which these are regulated, are to be sought for in 224 seq., which treat of verbs Pe Guttural. nrjN (marked with*) has treo forms; for which consult the Lexicon. No. XV. exhibits verbs ^*S , with a quiescent 5<. Those with (*) have two forms ; see Lex. Those with final n, may be omit- ted until after the exercises in verbs nb . No. XVI. exhibits, (a) Verbs of the first class "^'d , with Fut. Tseri in both syllables. Actual instances of the Fut. do not occur in all the examples, but they are ranged according to probabili- ty ; 244. a. (6) Verbs with final Paitahh and penult Hhireq long; 244. b. It should be added, that the penult syllable, rath- er than the ultimate, distinguishes these two species of verbs ; e. g. ^1.1 1 '^"j?. belong to the class a, because they have Tseri in the penult, and take Pattahh final only because of a Guttural or Resh, 5113. But in the class 6, the penult vowel is Hhireq ; and besides this, the Imp., Inf and Fut. usually retain the first radical, viz. the Yodh. No. XVII exhibits all the verbs of the second class ^D. Of these, *~\0'^ belongs, in Kal, to class 3d ; it is only in Hiphil, that its characteristics are developed. It should be noted, too, that ^:^ and Vji"^ , produced as examples in 249 of the Grammar, are not reckoned in the list contained in 248. Note. This is because *i::"^ , in one form and meaning of it, belongs to verbs of 62 PART I. NOTES ON NOS. XVIH XXIII. Class I. It is only when it has the sense o(Jingere, that it belongs to Class II. As to YP-I 1 ^t has no Hiphil, and consequently there is no certain means by which we can characterise it ; but the corresponding Arabic verb, viz. *^^:^ , belongs to the gen- uine class of ""S, in that language. No. XVIII. exhibits all the verbs of Class III., whether they belong wholly or partly to this species. Further examination of this class of verbs makes me more inclined to assign them, in gen- eral, to roots "jD, as Simonis and Eichhorn have done. But these lexicographers are not consistent throughout with themselves. For example, they call the Daghesh in the Inf. of ^ID^ , (in 'iD'^b 2 Chron. 31: 7), Dag. affectuosum (!) ; and the Fut. of "i^^ , viz. nk*] etc., they say, is borrowed from "1^2 ; to which, however, they assign no meaning kindred with that of S^I'' . So also, ns"}*^'; (1 Sam. 6: 12) is said to borrow its form from 1u3w ; all of which does not stand well together. As to the form m^ , it may be referred to the root hh: , Hiph. n'^iil, formed according to 261, in a manner resembling that of the Chaldee. But the student had better follow the Lexicons in his praxis ; I mean such Lexicons as conform to the arrangement of Gesenius, which differs from that of Simonis. No. XIX. exhibits verbs ]!:, whose different Futures, Impera- tives, Infinitives, etc. must be sought for in the Lexicon. Nos. XX. XXI. exhibit verbs h and "l^ , many of which also present more or less variations from the Paradigms ; all of which should be noticed in the exercises upon them. In No. XXI., a. exhibits such verbs as have T quiescent; 6. such as have a regular moveable 1, and are to be regularly declined ; c. verbs Ayin Yodh, which exhibit peculiar forms in Kal only. No. XXII. presents verbs i^b , with various combinations of As- pirates, Gutturals, etc. ; to which due attention should be paid. No. XXIII. consists of verbs np, in most of their varieties. The student should practise writing off and declining those which have Gutturals, Resh, etc. in them, as well as the others. The Lexicon will give him the various forms in the different conjuga- tions. PART I. NOTES ON NOS. XXIV XXXII. 63 No. XXIV. contains verbs nb , the peculiarities of which are designated in ^ 293. Note. For verbs doubly anomalous^ see Grammar $ 294 seq., which exhibits nearly all the cases that occur. NOUNS MASCUIilNE. No. XXV. nouns of Dec. I., with immutable vowels. The word niD^73 belongs here, only in its singular number. No. XXVI. nouns of Pec. II., with only the final vowel mutable. No. XXVU. nouns of Dec. III., with only the penult vowel mutalile. No. XXVIII. nouns of Dec. IV., with the ultimate and penult vowels mutable. The few which have a Segholate form in the construct state^ may be discovered by consulting the Lexicon ; see 355. 5. No. XXIX. nouns of Dec. V., with ultimate and penult vowels mutable, but in a peculiar way, so far as it respects the construct state ; 358. 3. No. XXX. exhibits nouns of Dec. VI., which has a large varie- ty of forms. The divisions, 1. 2.3. etc. explain themselves. The student should in a particular manner bestow his attention on this declension, both on account of its frequency in the language, and the difficulties which attend it. No. XXXI. nouns of Dec. VII., all of which seem to be mere participials^ having the form of the Part, present in Kal, and al- most exclusively an active sense. No. XXXll. exhibits nouns of Dec. VIII., which are not very numerous in the language. In making out the various forms, the student will be careful to note, that for the vowel-changes he must consult the other declensions, according to the nature of the vow- els in the words belonging to this. It is the reduplication of the last letter of the ground-form, in case of accession, and this only, which characterises Dec. VIII. It should be noted also, that strictly speaking, 'lip and hb , in the Paradigm of Dec. VIII. (Gramm. p. 228), do not belong to Dec. VIII., because the final letter is not actually doubled, when these words receive accession. So far as the mere mode of de- I 64 PART I. NOTES ON NOS. XXXIII XXXVII. clemion is concerned, these words belong to Dec. I. ; but in res- pect to the real implied nature of them, they rank with words in Dec. VIII. No. XXXIII. nouns of Dec. IX. These are quite uniform in their changes, and are but a small class in respect to number. NOUNS FEMININE. Nos. XXXIV XXXVII. exhibit the various classes of fern, nouns. The anomalous plurals of Dec. XIII. will require parti- cular attention. The Lexicons afford the necessary aid for ma- king out the various forms of them. PART II. NOTES AND EXPLANATIONS. In the Preface to my Hebrew Grammar, p. vii., 1 have given general directions for the first reading or study of the same, re- commending that the parts included in brackets should be omitted, and that when the student has advanced as far as the declension of wowns, he should begin to read and parse in the Chrestomathy. In addition to what is there generally said, I would now add, that the various accounts of all the irregular verbs may be lightly pas- sed over, in the Jirst reading of the Grammar ; for the object of this reading is rather to shew the student where he can find what he needs, than to make him acquainted with the details of the various forms, etc. of the language. When the student, there- fore, has advanced to 332 in the Grammar, and made a beginning in his exercises on Part 1. No. I. of this Chrestomathy, as directed in p. 57 above, he should then commence his exercises in Part. II. of this work, taking only a few words for the first lessons ; and at the same time, he should continue his grammatical recitations regular- ly, and also his exercise on Part I. as mentioned above, adapt- ing them, as to length, to the time which he has to spare for them. He must be cautioned here, against yet making the Chrestomathy a principal study, and the Grammar and Praxis only a subordinate one ; for the main object of the Chrestomathy is, to introduce him to a thorough knowledge of the Grammar and Praxis. In going forward with the Grammar beyond 332, the student may confine himself, for the first reading, principally to what is printed in large type. When he has advanced to the Syntax, let him stop there, and commence again with his Grammar, reading 9 66 , PART II. DIRECTIONS. carefully, but not committing to memory, what is included in brack- ets ; and after the brackets are omitted, (i. e. from ^ 332 onwards), reading in like manner what is printed in small type. During this second reading of the Grammar, let him commit to memory and recite regularly, the Paradigms of verbs and nouns, as they respectively occur. This will greatly facilitate learning to parse and construe, in the Chrestomathy ; while on the other hand, the exercises here will much facilitate, and render more interest- ing, his exercises in the Grammar and Praxis in Part 1. above. The teacher should take special care, all along, that the les- sons in the Chrestomathy be so apportioned as merely to pro- mote and accelerate the acquisition of the Grammar, and not to hiterfere at all with real and solid progress in it. Students are usually very desirous to push on, in obtaining a knowledge of the manner merely of translating Hebrew words, and seem to be satisfi- ed that they are making rapid progress in the language, when they can translate a considerable portion at a lesson. But this is a mistake ; and often it is one, which leads on so as utterly to de- feat, in the sequel, all accurate study and knowledge of the He- brew at a future period. Students will usually go on as they have begun to proceed ; and it is harder to turn about, and break up old habits of loose and inaccurate study, than it is to form a correct habit at the outset. It is for this reason, that 1 have chosen, so far as I am able by means of the notes which follow, to conduct the student in the way of thorough analysis, from the very beginning. I have tried both ways of studying a language, on myself and on my pupils ; and 1 am most fully persuaded, that for adults^ it is best to enter radically into analysis, from the very outset. It may be different with children ; but in the business of this Chrestomathy, children are not concerned. I have endeavoured to leave nothing unexplained in the Notes, which the student may know, and ought to know, in the initial stages of his study. All my readers have before them, in these Notes, what 1 should give ihem if 1 were personally present as their instructer. By proceeding in this way, they will go slowly^ PART II. DIRECTIONS. 67 indeed, at first, but surely. In a little time, principles will begin to appear plain and familiar. Apparent irregularities in the forms of words will diminish apace, by a constant reference to those parts of the Grammar which explain them ; and these once mas- tered, the progress will be much more rapid in Hebrew, than either in Latin or Greek ; for the former language is far more simple than either of the latter. In going the second time over the Grammar, the student should proceed on through the Syntax. On completing this, let the stu- dy of the whole Grammar be immediately recommenced, with more particularity than before ; and so a fourth, a fifth, and (at least) a sixth time. The regular recitation, at every Lecture, of some portion of the Grammar, should not be intermitted at all, for the first six months of study. In regard to the Accents^ I have introduced but few of them into this second part. I did not wish to embarrass the student with too many of them, at first. I have used only such as serve for the larger pause-accents ; or such as mark a penult tone-sylla- ble. The latter I have employed, principally for the sake of di- recting the student where to lay the stress of voice, in reading the Hebrew words. Those which are not marked with any accents, have the tone on the ultimate syllable, according to the general rule in 99 of the Grammar ; a considerable number, also, which are marked with pause-accents, have the tone on the ultimate. Most persons who study the Hebrew, either partially or wholly neglect the Accents. They do so, because it seems to re- quire too much time and attention to become well acquainted with them. But such a knowledge of them as is requisite for grammatical and exegetical purposes, may be attained with a very moderate share of attention. Let this be obtained gmc/Ma%, from the commencement of study, and the loss of time occasioned by it will never be felt. The student may rest assured, that he nev- er will regret having followed this advice. The accents are not, indeed, of any binding authority ; but they are often a grateful exegetical and grammatical aid. At any rate, no Hebrew student can fail to perceive, that an acquaintance with them is desira- 6s PART II. DIRECTIONS. NOTES ON NO. I. ble. He need not go into the fictitious schemes and subtiities of a Wasmuth, a Boston, and many others, concerning them ; but their general and usual powers and object, he ought to understand. In reciting this second Part, the student should be required to give an account of the principle or the rule, in the Grammar, to which any and every reference is made in the Notes that follow. The instructer will thus be enabled to determine, whether the student has bestowed due labour upon the acquisition of what he professes to recite. Should the learner, at any time, feel himself unable to con- strue any of the select Sentences, in Part II., he will find, in the Notes, a reference to the place in the Hebrew Bible from which any sentence is extracted. He can, therefore, consult Hhe cor- responding English translation, if necessary. In regard to such passages, however, as are taken from the book of Psalms, the English and the Hebrew verses do not always correspond. The reason is, that in Hebrew, the title of a Psalm is reckoned as its first verse ; but in English, this is never done. Consequently, when the Psalm has a title, the English verses are one behind the Hebrew, and must be looked for accordingly. 1. Ps. 7:12. CJ^^Nt, ground form sing. Jin^N; {i^Ho^h), Dec. !., the final He having Mappiq, 84,* and consequently being movea- ble. The vowel under the He is Pattahh furtive, 69, which, not being a proper vowel, fails away when the word is changed by receiving the accession fi''^ , which forms the plural, 325. The ) in the sing, is omitted in the plural, because the syllable joined on to make the plural, has a Quiescent in it, 65. C^r^.pN: agrees with C:2VIJ , a Part, in the singular, 437. 2. DSTCJ, act. Part., root t2C;D, 202. It is here, (and so often elsewhere), employed as a verb in the present tense, announcing * Note. Throughout, the first reference in common numerals, is to the Section ($) in the Hebrew Grammar. If tliere be a second, or third reference connected, they relate to subdivi- sions under the fust. But when several sections are referred to in succession, tiiesigns^ stand before them, or the word and, or also, is inserted between them. FART II. NOTES ON NOS. I III. tJlTJVBESn ^ a general proposition, Syntax 527. a. Meaning : ' God vindicates, decides in favour of, the rigliteous.* y'^T^ , adj. used as a noun, and employed here in a generic sense, i. e. as a noun of multitude ; with vowels immutable^ and therefore like Dec. I. of nouns ; Ace. after UDTi; , Synt. 531. The accent under the word p'''^:^ , although of the same form as the Methegh, is not one here, and never is one at the end of a verse, but is a Silluq^ 85. Note, also 93. No. 1. The two large square points, after p^T4 , are the Hebrew period, called pnOB ^^.0 , i. e. end of a verse. With these, Silluq invariably stands connected, be- ing either on the ultimate or penult syllable of the final word. This explanation will serve for all future cases of the same nature. II. Ecc. 3: 17. nii sign of the Ace, 408. 4. and 427. The ground form nJJ , with a long vowel (Tseri), shortens that vowel here because Maqqeph follows, 89. i>\I5"i!l , the syllable n is the article, whose usual punctuation is tl followed by a Daghesh forte, 162. 163. As the Daghesh cannot be admitted into the "i. 111, the vowel Pattahh belonging to the article is prolonged instead thereof, 112; see also 152. a. 2. ^''2^~\ is an adj. employed as a generic noun (like p^T^ in No. 1) of Dec. IV., in the Ace. here, governed by t:2'J::i . Note ; the position of the Ace. before the verb or Part, which governs it, seldom occurs in Hebrew, except among the inversions which po- etry occasions. tisi^*;, Fut. of L25d, 197. 198. Meaning: ' God will condemn, pronounce sentence against, the wicked.' tic'ip" may also be ren- dered in the present tense, ' condemns,' as in universal proposi- tions, Synt. 504. 6. t3"'nbiT ' - IT ' But the Daghesh is here euphonic (not lene), 75. a, and is called Dag. conjvnctive ; for the word n^'^ is preceded by a sylla- ble ending in a vowel, which has no accent upon it (comp. 80), and Dagh. lene would be omitted in such a case. The two words, n5'^"n:p') , are read, ytq-ned-dd-dth. The Maqqeph between them takes away the accent from the first word, 89. XIV. Ps. 94: 11. n^n^inNo. 10. xni^, No.9. nin^rtXD, Dec. XI. or XIII. const, plur. ti'lN , Dec. IV. but it has no const, or plur. state. -3 that, conj. Tn^n they, or they are, Synt. 469. In Mzan , the T^-. is paragogic, as the penult accent denotes, it being under the first syllable. The accent here employed, is a cou'- 10 74 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XIV XIX. junctive^ viz. Merka, 93. No. 23. In regard to the penult tone, see 100. t. 'b's.ti , orig. form b^r? i which has its first vowel changed by a pause-accent, 144. Dec. VI. ^ and E form. XV. Prov. 9: 10. nVrin, Dec. X. const. rr^^Dh {hhbkk- ?rtd) Dec. X., Gen. after n^nn, 332. ni*-)"), No. II. Before this word, the verb of existence (n^rj) is understood^ 554. In such propositions it is very rarely expressed. n?^"] , see in No. 9, where the larger pause-accent prolongs the first vowel. Here, the accent (which marks the penult tone, 100. a) being only of the second class of Disjunctives, 93. No. 5, it produces no effect on the vowel ; as is often the case. t]"*"i;'7p , lit. of the Holy ones., i.e. of God, the plural being used as plur. ex- cellentiae., 437. 2. g. The sing, is 'i:^^J^ , Dec. 111. For the omis- sion of the Vav in the plural, see on QTjbNt under No. 1. ns'^S, Dec. X., the verb of existence being understood before it, 554. XVI. Ecc. 1: 18. ii:3, 3 a preposition, Dag. lene, 79. 1; 1"^, Dec. VIII. form as c, no plur^il; with Maqqeph -nn {robh) short 0, 89. D?S^ from D>3, with pause-accent, 93. No. 2. Sj'^Di"''], 1 conj. ?l''C''"', Fut. Hiph. from qD^ , 243. 6. n^'l with accent on the penult tone, 100. a. iTi>lD^ , Dec. I. the vowels be- ing immutable. XVII. Prov. 12: 1. n-.N for it^lN , 63. also 202. and Synt. 527. a. ^0^73, Dec. II. i\:V^"i , i conj., ^<2V^, 202. nhiin, Dec. XII., n at the beginning Raphe., i. e. without Dag. lene, 80 and 83, because of the preceding vowel, with conjunctive accent on the penult tone, 100. a. XVIII. Ps. 22: 29. ni-'^,No. 10. n^^^Tsn, ibid. b^itt^ 202 and 527. a. D";^-!? , z with Dag. lene, 79. 2. The full form would be D'^/'iinS , but the article n suffers syncope in such cases, 152. a. Note. XIX. Ps. 145: 13. ^n^::^!'^, n5)5^73 , noun. fem. Dec. I. in the sing., a Heteroclite in the plural, not ranking under any of the declensions, with vowels immutable ; e. g. plur. ni'2)r73 , 326. c. For the omission of Dag. lene in the ID, see 82. b. "^ suff. pron, of 2d person, 336. Par. a. 2d masc. singular. . PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XIX XXI. 75- niD^:^, in reg., the verb of existence being understood before it, 554. b3 {kol), 89. n''73r'y, from dbny, Dec. 11. For the omis- sion of the 1, see 63. Lit. thy kingdom [is] a kingdom of all ages^ regnum universitatis seculorum^ i. e. eternal. 'ririr>t;?3721 , 1 in- stead of*) , 152. c. 4, noun of Dec. XIII., i\ suff., point over it is the accent Rebhia, 93. No. 10. b^S {bekhbl), 89. Beth with Dag. lene, because a pause-accent precedes, 79.3. 11"^, Dec. I. Sm , 1 instead of 1 , 152. c. 3. XX^ Ps. 103: 19. ri^l2'^z for ti^^-^Jiz, 152. a. Note, n being the article ; C^^'iJ , dual form, but used as plural, 329. Note 2. For the accent at the beginning of the word, see 93. No. 5. 95. a. The real tone-syllable is the penult here, 100. 6. "^n Hiph. of ]^D, ']"'pn is a contracted form, used instead of 'J'^'J^n , 268. b. e. g. i^p3, root N&3=J , 282. 6. and Par XVI. f]D , without Dag. lene in the D, because a vowel sound precedes without a disjunctive accent, 80, in reg. with tl^?3-) ; which last word is of Dec. X. Lit. n^iq-j f)?, the hand of sloth. ^^ , const, of 1^ , Dec. II. a. 3"^n"i^ , adj. with Qamets immu- table, because it stands for t]''i=)'^h, 1 12. and 32, plur. of ^llh . ^^di'P), Fut. Hiph. 3 pers. sing. fem. (l^ the Nom. is fem.), from ^'4Jy , Fut. in Kal is with the rough enunciation, "iu;y.]; , 225. Par. IV. The accent under Shin is Silluq. 93. No. 1 ; that under the Tav is Methegh, 87. a. XXIII Prov. 10: 6. ni^na , plur. Dec. XI. c.^^in (foruji^^ 118, or for *i5Nn 119. c. 3), a Heteroclite in its plur. forms, e. g. fi'^'*l;N1 , etc., if considered merely in respect to appearance. In reality, \::wN1=^Nh , 119. c. 3, and D^"iZ5Nn=D"'m-5 , 118; and these forms would be regular in Dec. VI. i. It is preceded by the verb of existence implied, 554. ^5=) , ^ 152. c. 4; 'D const, of nc, plur. n''S and ni*5, a Heter- oclite. rr^J;^^. , plur. Dec. IV. nl^D"; , Fut. Piel of rfD3,-282. h. D73h , Dec. IV. On the sense of this latter hemistich, com- mentators are much divided. Umbreit, the latest commentator on the book of Proverbs, understands "'S as designating the organ of enjoyment., and construes the clause thus : ' The injustice which the evil man practises, prevents his enjoyment of divine bless- ings.' This, however, seems rather far-fetched. May not Rom. III. 19, 'iva nav Gzofia g^oay/J, cast some light upon the phrase? The sentiment may be, ' The man of violence, instead of being blessed of Jehovah, shall be treated as guilty ;' or, (as it seems to be here expressed), ' No plea for himself shall be admitted, his vio- lence shall cover, i. e. stop, his mouth.'^ GTOf,ia uvtov q)QU'^&ri(iexav. PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XXIIl XXVI. 77 Another explanation is, perhaps, equally probable, if not more SO. DXDil may designate the violence done to the wicked, not done by him; and so be the direct antithesis ofniDna blessings^ in the preceding clause. So Ziegler understands it, in his commentary on the Proverbs. The sense would then be, ' Violence, i. . se- vere punishment, shall stop the mouth of the wicked, i. e. strike him dumb, render him unable to speak ;' a lot very different from that of the righteous, ' on whose head blessings rest.' XXIV. Prov. 10: 7. n3). (also ^DT), with ace. Munahh mark- ing the penult tone, Dec. VI. e and d, const, before p'"7'4 ; which last is used in a generic sense. tl^n^b, h prep, pointed with Hhireq because it comes before another Sheva, 137, and its own proper point is Sheva, "b , 152. b. But two Shevas before a vow- el are inadmissible, 90. 2. comp. 43 seq. ; consequently the first goes into a short vowel, 137. The verb of existence is under- stood before niD^lb (which is of Dec. XI.), and the noun with its preposition, is used as an adjective, 442 ; i. e. ' The name of the righteous shall be blessed^^ meaning that men will bless or speak well of them. C'^j*) , (t 152. c), const, of S^j , Dec. VII. a. :3p^^% 212. 1, jj with Silluq, 144. XXV. Prov. 10: 9. ^biii, 202. Dins, (for t3=inn3, 152. a. Note), Din with 1 merely a ftdcrum^ 64, because the Hholem here is pure ; before Maqqeph it is DI^ ^ , see under No. 23. XXVII. Prov. 10: 19. nn3, No. 16. D^^^n-r, plur. Dec IV. a. b^ti;, Par. IV. S'^is , ground-form 5?U:e, Dec. Vl.h; for Qa- metsunder e, 144. ^^TCtZJ, dual with suff. V^ ,from?lCiD , Dec. XI. a. b"^3ip^ , Part. Hiph. from b'D^. XXVIII. Prov. 10: 20. In !:ip.3, the accent Munahh marks the penult as the seat of the tone, nhi: , Part. Niph. p-irb , Dec. III. ; verb of existence before it, Synt. 554. nb , No. 5. t3y^3 , 3 conj. here becomes S , see b in No. 24. Dr^s , (without accent t2y^), a proper adj. Lit. ' The heart of the wicked [is] like something little^ or, like a little thing /' i. e. is mean, worth- XXIX. Prov. 16: 3. V^ , Imp. of bba , 257. rt^n^ bN ra, de- valve upon J ehova, i.e. confide, or commit to him. ':|'' 13^53, with Methegh under Mem, 87. a, and Athnahh on the penult tone-sylla- ble, plur. suff. Tj"^- , root rrt35??3 , Dec. IX. ^23 ',2 1 1 Vav conver- sive, 208. ^rb"; , Fut. Niph. from 113, Par. XIII. ; the round dot over the Kaph is the ace. Rebhia, marking the penult tone. ^^nhujh?? , plur. suff. ^% , Dec. XI. and Xlll., from ?in'^h^ , with Silluq on the penult. XXX. Prov. 15: 33. r)ii_y,, No. 11. 1D^^, const, of Dec. II., verb of existence implied before it, 554. "'^cb') , T conj. ; i: prep., with Hhireq short, 137 ; "^pS , const, plur. of 0*^33, which has no sing. 327. 3. The probable ground-form in the sing, is njS, Dec. IX. "^psb used as a prep. 407. c. For b with Hhireq, see in No. 24. nin3, Dec. HI. !rii:y, Dec. XI., verb of existence im- plied before it, 554. Meaning : ' The fear of Jehova, i. e. piety, is the instruction of wisdom,' i. e. wise instruction, 440, or, a learn- ing of wisdom ; ' and before honour,' i. e. exaltation or praise from men, 'is humility,' viz. a humble, unambitious spirit, is of greater worth than any honour which men can bestow ; or, ' honour is preceded by humility,' i. e. the way to attain true honour is to be humble. XXXI. Prov. 16: 2. ^i^-^ , const, plur. Dec. VI. a. ^r, adj. Dec. Vlll., sing, and in concord with bs . I'^pS^a , 3 prep., 'J'^J'^i^, PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XXXIl XXXV. 79 from 1";^, Dec. VI. o. dual const. 338. 339, suflf. in 336. "{iDh Part. act. Kal. nmn, comm. gen. Dec. I., sing, m-i with Pattahh furtive, 69. For fern. plur. see 327. 1, comp. 321. Meaning: ' In a man's own view his actions are pure ; but Jehovah, who looks upon the heart of man, estimates him according to the character of his spirit or internal man.' XXXll. Prov 16: 6. n:p>N;.T , 1 for "i, 152 c n^5< , an abridged form of nD7:^^, 107. 2. The prep. 2 is understood before it *^SD^ , Fut. Pual from 153 , used as present tense, 504. b. 115? (i?d-i>dn), Dec. III. DwNl'jn^, T 152. c. 4; 3 prep. 11 D, Inf const, as a noun, 519. yiTD, 73 prep, for ^a, 406. The ) is commonly assimilated with the letter which follows it, and written by a Dagh. forte, 107. 1 ; but here the Dagh. is excluded, 111 seq. ^'1 adj., ground-form i'l , which the pause-accent prolongs, used as a noun here, 445. Meaning : ' By kindness and faithfulness sin is covered,' i. e. is forgiven, the punishment of it is remitted; ' and by piety [comes] turning away from evil,' i. e. reverence for God occasions departure from evil. XXXIU. Prov. 15: 29. pini , adj. and predicate of the sen- tence ; therefore placed before the noun, 446. 73 before f^J^l , see 3>-;73 in No. 32. n^Dn=l , n 152. c. 4 ; n'^Bn const of Dec. X. ^fyp"^^ , pause-accent on the final vowel lengthens the Pattahh^ 144. I. XXXIV. Prov. 16: 9. nit^h'; , Fut Piel from ii^jh .--i31'3 , sufF. form of '^i^ , Dec. VI. a. nin^} , for pointing see nin^'b in No. 10. I-^D^, Fut Hiph. from ^13.-1^22, Dec. VI. suff. state, from ^y:z , class A^ Methegh under Tsadhe, 87. a, Silluq un- der Daleth. Meaning: ' Let a man devise his way,' i. e. lay out plans for his future employments and success, ' it is the Lord who must establish his goings,' i. e. his success depends on the aid which the Lord may afford. XXXV. Prov. 16: 12. n^y/in, Methegh under Tav, 87. a. Q'^3b73, Dec. VI. n^tJ^., Inf const of Jim, used as a noun, 519, preceded by ti^n understood, 554. 5?^1 , Dec. VI. class. The pause-accent here has no influence in prolonging the vowel which precedes it, 149, it only marks the penult tone. nj^liCS, points 80 PART a. NOTES ON NOS. XXXV XXXIX. ing of the prep, ^, 137 ; *1 has no Dagh. l^e, although it follows a silent Sheva, 81. 2. ps*; , Fut. Niph. of ]n3. ^03, see ^^03 in No. 20. Meaning : It is an abominable thing for kings to do evil; but by the practice of equity, the throne is established.' XXXVI. Prov. 16: 16. nzf:. , for Methegh see 87. j, rare form of Inf const, from t^:j? , 283. 2 ; used as a noun const. 519. iitS""n^, mdM66A, with Dagh. euphonic in t), 75. comp. 170. Note. yTnh73, 72 is the particle of comparison, 454, Dagh. omit- ted io n , 111. ni:p=], reg. Inf. const, of ^Sj? , used as a noun const. 519. ^hlas, Part. Niph. from "^h2, sense of the Latin Part, in dus, 529. ^03J2,73 comparative here, 454; 3 instead of S, 144. Lit. ITie acquiHlion of wisdom, how good compared with gold ! and the acquisition of intelligence is to be chosen, in preference to sil- ver. XXXVIL Prov. 16: 18. ^z^}, in No. 30. -in^ , Dec. VL E class. The accent Merka, 93. No. 23, marks the penult tone. yiiiii , Dec. in. 554, the Athnahh under i< belongs to the final syl- lable, the accent being placed on the letter which immediately pre- cedes the vowel of a syllable, 98. "jib^JD , Dec. III. d. na^, Dec, VI. k, with HeMappiq, 84. const, state before ^=l"\, Merka marks the penult tone. h^Jn , see in No. 31. Meaning : ' Pride precedes destruction ; and haughtiness of spirit is the precursor of stum- bling,' i. e. of ruin. The prep, "p.sb signifies bejore in respect to time, as well as in respect to space ; see Lex. XXXVIII. Prov. 16: 25. ti^, indeclinable, peculiar, see Lex. ^n jT. , with Munahh on the penult tone. ^:s^b, before, i. e. in the view of, in the sight of. nn^'^tl^^ , H- a fern, suff., 336 ; '7-^,'^ which precedes, is comm. gender, and a fern suffix may follow. The adj. n^; , also agreeing with "^i"^ , is masculine ; comp. 451. '^^.-)'7, const, plur. of ']"\/T. , the 5 being without Dagh. lene, 81. 1, because the ground-form 0*^3 -^"^ excludes Dagh. lene. Mean- ing : ' There is a course of conduct, which men may judge to be right, but which leads to destruction.' The phrase rtl'n 'Dn^ means, ' deadly ways, destructive ways.' XXXIX. Prov. 16: 81. nTJsy, const, of Dec. XIII., the ac- TART II. NOTES ON NOS. XXXIX XLIV. ^ cent Munahh (93. No. 21) marks the penult tone syllable. n")>NtDri, Dec. XIII., accent as before. irrn'^'^ , 554. *]";\i with Merka on the penult. nj^^^ i Dec. XI. N:'J!n , 3 pers. fem. Fut. Niph., agreeing with nn'^'-i . Lit. A crown of beauty is old age^ should it be found in the "soay of righteousness. XL. Prov. 16: 28. niDE-n, S for ^5, 41 and 65. hV^;-) , Fut. Piel; for final Pattahh, see 236. ]ti:3, Dec. III. ]^-): , Dec. II. n-^ns'/j , Part. Hiph. from ins, 527. q^V*?, Dec. I. Lit. A tale-bearer separateth intimate friends^ ?1T?J;{ being generic, i. e. having a phiral sense. XLI. Prov. 16: 32. Isit:, 446. '^'^.N , Munahh marks the pe- nult tone-syllable, from 'jnwV , Dec. V. c^._Q";^^^ , Dual of qj^ : which is a contraction of ?)3N, Nun being occulted, 107. 2; ac- cent Tiphhha anterius^ 93 No. 5, the real tone-syllable is the pe- nult, 45. a. In the form 5:iN , with an implied Daghesh, (a compen- sation for the : dropped), it belongs to Dec. VIII ; see in Par. XXVII. Lit. D^2fi$ 11^.1 '^^^ protracted of anger, i.e. he who protracts his anger, who is patient, forbearing. *i^3a^ , 12 corn- par., see under No. 36. ^'^12 for 7'^"'J2^ Part. act. 63. 13 573 , 72 compar. particle, as before ; "i^'b, Part. act. "T':^', Dec. I. as to the sing., but plur. Dec. VI. p. XLH. Prov. 17: l.n^t:,No. 41 ns,fem. Dec. VIILMn^n fem. of anh . ni Vu: , Dec. XII., fem. of Vr2: . n3 , 408. Par. of 2 . n^572,'^3 comparative, 454. N^:^ , Part. 202. Note 1 ; or participial adj. governing the Ace. after it, 511. e.g. "^hl^t , const, pi. of h^T , Dec. VI. E class, governed by ^'^12 , 511. XLIH, Prov. 17: 3. ?T?.^^ , Dec. VII. ?ip3> ,' for ;^p3nb , 152. a. Note, Dec. VI. a. The tone is on the penult, but the ac- cent (Tiphhha anterius) is praeposiiire^ 95. a. 3iriTb for ^nrnb , 152. a. Note, Dec. IV. ]ha for]hi2, act. Part. 63. n^ab , see No. 5. nirr; , 554. XLIV. Prov. 17: 9. r:S372 , part. Piel. 5>d.C , tone on penult, 95. a. 'I^jP.n^ , Part. Piel. rariii_, Dec. X., Methegh under the Aleph, 87. a. n:\D (for np.vi;). Part. act. of nrii^ , followed by n before the noun which it governs, 5U6 "ii^na , n Raphe, 80. Meaning 11 82 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XLIV XLVII. ' a matter, a report, a thing.' n""-!?? , Part. Hiph., 527. P)iVn , No. 40. XLV. Prov. 17: 13. I'^t^., Part. Hiph. from ST^ , 268. b> Par. XIII. rryn , Dec. X. fern, of yn, which properly involves a Daghesh forte ; and this is the reason why In^n has the first vow- el immutable, HI and 127. ^"-ITiri, Fut. Kal 3 pers. fem., agree- ing with Jiy"^, root t!^72. irT'z;2, suff. state of IT^.S, Dec. VI. o, with praefix Mem. XLVI. Prov. 17: 14. '^p.is, form of Part. act. from ^125; us- ed here as a noun, however, for the act of letting out water. The form has been a great stumbling block to critics, who seem in general to have supposed, that words of this form could denote nothing but an active agent ; e. g. ">p.''^ a shepherd^ ^^.^n a sailor^ i;;ii< an enemy ^ ^V^ a seer^ etc. But it is a mistake, to suppose that this form always implies an agent. For example, '^tV)'^ resid' uum^ the residue^ nb^S? a holocaust^ and fem. nntb lead^ are clear cases of a different nature. In accordance with the tenor of these words, may itJ^D be understood as meaning, "the letting out ;" which being a kind of active sense, is even less remote, than the examples above, from the common analogy. In this way, all the obscurity about the text is removed. As the sentence has a comparative sense necessarily implied in it, the particle 3 as, is to be understood before nDiD, 559. tJ'^g , 329. Note 2, with accent praepos. rT''4;fi'"\n the friend), will be constant in his affection; and a true brother will help in times of adversity.' XLVIII. Prov. 17:19. ln>, No.47. 2?'rB ,accent 95. r72^, Dec. X. Lit. he loveth harm^ that loveth strife. y'lIJB , I understand here, with Umbreit, as meaning, ' the consequences of transgres- sion,' viz. punishment, or harm. So DNtiti sin^ and "jiy iniquity ^ also mean, the consequences (f sin, viz. punishment, misfortune, af- fliction. In respect to this sense of 3>iz5S , comp. Dan. 9: 24. So often, dfnaQTia in the New Testament. The like expression in Proverbs is, " All that hate me, love death." In this way, a truly poetic parallelism between the two members of the sentence, is preserved. n"3att , Part. Hiph., with He Mappiq and regular, 84. 'ihns, from hn? , Dec. VL E class, with suff. i. M";?.n?3 , Part. Hiph. with final Tseri shortened to Seghol, 89. ^^/-f^ , with accent, 144. i. q. "^5/4J . Meaning : ' He who demeans himself with haughti- ness, will occasion his own destruction.' I understand this figurative description of pride, or exaltation, as grounded on the custom of princes, nobles, and wealthy men, in the East, erecting a lofty portico in front of their dwellings, through which the entrance into them lay. The ruins of the temples in Egypt, at Baalbec, Palmyra, and other places, exhibit the same taste in architecture. In reference to this same custom, (an emblem of honour or elevation), I understand the terms Sub- lime Porte^ (Ital. Porta, German, Pforte) as applied to the Otto- man Emperor at the present day. The lofty gate, (for so Sublime Porte means), is a designation intended to point out him who lives in the dwellings connected with the lofty gate^ i. e. the gate which by way of eminence is lofty, or the most lofty of all ; in other words, it means the Emperor or reigning Monarch. Whether this explanation does not better accord with the oriental manner 84 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XLVIII LV. of framing designations, than the explanations commonly given of Sublinaj Porte, the reader acquainted with the style of the East may jud^e. When the same terms are applied to designate the Ottoman Emperor and his Divan, i. e. his Council, they are employ- ed in a like figurative way. XLIX. Prov. 17: 25. T'nN , root njj , for the suff. form, see Par. XXIV. No. II. "jB, 554. ?"'DD, in apposition with "ja , 435. nr:/2=l, the accent Rebhia is over the Mem, 93. No. 10, and marks the tone-syllable. in'ir^''. Part. act. fern, from ibl , used as a noun of Dec. XIII. a. Sense : '' A grief, or cause of bitterness, to his mother.' L. Prov. 18: 6. ^''Dp, const, dual of Dec. XT., from Jicr, n without Pag. lene, 81. 1. ^^in^ , Par. XX., Munahh marks the pe- nult tone. T^DI , T 162. c. 4; VD phiv^ with suff. i, "'0 a Hetero- clite from HE. nvabn's, pi. of Dec. X., Methegh, 87. a. Mnp";, 277. c. Sense : '' A fool's lips come along with (cause) conten- tion ; and his mouth calls for smiting;' i.e. he loves contention, and calls for, promotes assaults. LI. Prov 18: 7. ^S, const, of TlS. '^V-nnlrT^ , mfhhlt-idl-ld^ Dec. X., with Dagh. euphonic in ihe b , 75 , Synt. 554. wp.'i?3, a verbal noun from iLp^, Dec. VII. 6, Synt. as above. VwC: , from 'Xi'oz , Dec. VI. a, suff. form. Lll. Prov. 18: 9. HBinTa, Part. Hiph. from HDn . inpjtb^, suff. state of nD.Vr72, Dec. XI., (for rrD.^r'? 118), with f^ otiant^ 118. Note 2. iX=in, is Ae, 469. D^'n'O'D byn'p , lit. to him who is possessor of wasting^ 1. e. to a waster or prodigal, 444. c. ; n'^hu^n , Part. Hiph. LIll. Prov. 18: 10, r";:^^ , const, of Dec. IV. fi'^i, const, of Dec. VII., 554. is , into it, form in 408. yn^ , Fut. Kal of yi'\ , used for the Present, 504. 6. na'p: , Part. Niph., lit. is elevated; i. e. is secure, safe, like one who betakes himself to an elevated place, and thus places himself out of the reach of enemies. LIV. Prov. 18: 13. n^:;72 , Part. Hiph. from Sr::, "ini n-^uitt , he who gives answer to any matter. Q^uS , before, as an adverb, 403. a. nV IN , i^lV'Ve-lelh, with penult tone. N^n , 469. LV. Prov. 18: 14. ir3":rD"; , Fut. Pilpelof b^2, 176. 3. ^nbhp., PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LV LX. suff. State of Dec. IX., from riiri^f^^ , Methegb, 87. a ; for the suff., see 379. 2, and comp. suff. in 309. c nND: , fern. adj. from ix'::, 554. yjj, he who has*- ienefA, Part. act. from y^M to urge forward^ to hasten. tJ'^b^'l, dualofb^n., Par. XXVII., penacuted, 100. 6. Ntp.in, Part. act. as a verb, 527. Sense : ' He who urges rashly forward with his feet, without considering how he is proceeding, NtJitl, will make a mis-step, i. e. will stumble, or, will err from the right way.' LVllI. Prov. 19: 5. ny, Dec. Vll. ^. Q-^-ij^^J, plur. of -||^.i|j Tiec'^L.^Wt a -witness of falsehoods.^ i.e. a false witness, 440. nj^S^ , Fut. Niph. h-iD^ , Fut. Hiph. from n^S. Q-ilTD , Dec. IV. lit. he who breathes out lies., comp. Acts ix. o Si ^avlog ito e^nvtoiv wuiXi]^ nui (povov itg Tovg f.iu&i]Tag tou KvqIqv. t3b.72"]', Fut. Niph. LIX. Prov. 1 9: 9. "l^wN"^ , 240. It is easy to see, that this proverb is the same as that in No. 57. The last word only dif- fers ; but the sense' which it conveys, is the same as that of i< \ Dec. VIII. d, from tJwN , 130. c. a. ^S"1^, 230. T-i:, with suff. ]i;::'^^3, Dec. I., in the midst of. So the text should be read, viz. ]rL"J<3 , and not (as in the common editions) lVi;^N3, i. e. 'j=)U;^^3 , the Q^^ri noting on the margin that the ^ in the first word is superfluous. The latter form is a Chal- dee word, and is only a stale gloss of the passage, which does not seem to have been correctly understood by the Masorites. T-^'n, Dec. VI., the dot over the right tooth of the Shin is a Hho- lem for the preceding letter, as well as a diacritical point for the Shin, 62. 2. LXX. Prov. 21: 1. '^jb'q , const, plur. Dec. VI. a, omits Daghesh lene in :>, see the ground of this in 81. I. e.g. ^\ , from nb , 89. 12 1 const, of n^ , Dec. II. a. The conj. 3 as., is to be understood before "^^bs , 561. c. Meaning: 'Jehovah directs the hearts of men, as easily as he does the rivers of water.' bs A;d/, from b3, 89. ybn^ , 225.-121:2 , Fut. Hiph. from nt:: , Par. XIX., with suff. epenthetic, 309. d. 3 sing, masc, comp. in Par. XXIII. Hiph. Fut. epenth. Lit. Unto all which he chooses, he inclines it, viz, the FART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXX LXXIII. 89 heart of mnn. The student will notice the frequency of the Maq- qeph, in the whole sentence. LXXI. Prov. 21: 17. ^iOll^ , Dec. I., ^10^)3 u:\X , a man of poverty^ i. e. a poor man, shall be {niri"] is understood, 554) the lover of mirth , but the latter, however, is the Nom. before the verb of existence, when rightiy translated, i.e. the meaning is, 'A lover of mirth shall be a poor m:m.' 'j'^>, Dec. VI. o. ']'Dpi ,3 152. c. 3. The second point over the tooth of the Shin, together with the accent on the right of the Vav, constitute the composite accent Rebhia Geresh, 93. No. 11, and mark the pe- nult tone. -\*U,y;, 224 ; for Methegh, see 87. a. LXXll. Prov. 21: 27. trnt, Dec. VI. A, the accent Munahh marks the tone on the penult, 93. No. 21. CV;^-) , plur. of Dec. IV. a. nn^pn, Dec XI. 6, verb of existence implied before it, 554. "^3 7\ii , how much more^ see Lex. under i:]w\ . The Methegh under "*D is according to the rule in 87. /, the accent being thrown off from ""S by the Maqqeph, 89, and the tone being on the ulti- mate of n?2p..~-J-:72T , Dec. X. ^Eij^-^n^ , Fut. Hiph. of w\n2, Par. XX. The Qamets under the praeform. Yodh is dropped, because the accent is thrown forward on account of the suffix ^3_. , which is the epenth. form 3 sing, masc, 309. d ; see in Par. XXII. Fut. Sentiment: 'The sacrifice of the wicked is not pleasing to God; how much more must it be unpleasing, when he presents it !l7aT2, with a crcfty intention^ i. e. hypocritically, mala animo^ with the intention of deceiving.' LXXllI. Prov. 22: 2. n"^"!;:^ , adj. used as a noun, 445, Dec. III.T am/, 152. c. 3. "i'n , Part, of 'iinn, Par. XIII., used as a noun of multitude ; declined as in Par XXI. iy . Ti^ii c: , with ac- cent, instead of 1'::i?Q2 without accent, 146. For the sense of meeting together^ i.e. of a reciprocal meeting, see in 182. b. 6. nu/'i? , const, state of the Part. H'^b, Dec. IX., from ni2J3?, Par. XVI. 1!>5, Q- suff., Lamedh takes Dag. forte, because bs the ground form belongs to Dec. VIII. e, conip. 129. c. b. Meaning: ' The Lord has ordained, that men shoixld consist of both rich and poor ; let both regard this as being arranged by his Providence, 12 90 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXXIII LXXVI. that so the rich may not despise the poor, nor the poor envy the rich.' LXIV. Prov. 22: 14. n,'pa_:j, fern, of p73:?, Dec. VIII., see in 323. Dec. VIII. ph. "^S, const, of ns . nini , Part. fem. plur. from ^n, Par. XXI. i^f . STS^T, pass. Part, const, of ai^T, in reg. as a noun, 532. b ; ni?l^ tli?": , the object of the indignation of Jeho- vah^ he with "whom Jehovah is angry. See, for such a latitude of meaning in case of regimen and Gen., 424. h'^B'l , Fut. of bS3 y Par. XI. The T is superfluous. It is read, ylp-pol^ because the Hholem is shortened before the Maqqeph, 89. The star over the word refers to a Note (usually printed in the margin oppo- site, in our common Hebrew bibles, but) put at the bottom of the page, in this Chrestomathy. The note, T n'^n'^ , means, Vav is superfluous ; comp. 64. The vowel-points are written just as if the orthography were "V^"] . C'lIJ , therein^ adv. viz. into the deep ditch, mentioned in the first part of the sentence. LXXV. Prov. 24: 24. n^.i^, 6 emwv, he who saith^ Part, ac- tive. Jink , with pause-accent Merka Mahpakh, 93. No. 3. Usu- ally the accent above^ is on a different letter from the one below; which latter marks the tone-syllable, 95. b. But the length of the word here, does not permit this usage in regard to the po- sition of the accents; nr^h for nnJ^ , 144. ^nnp-; , Fut. Kal of 3|5:, with suff. ^ri, on account of which the preceding ^ , which would stand at the end of the verb, is omitted in the orthography, 65 ; and the Vav thus falling out, Qibbuts vicarious is employed in the room of ^, 41. -D^73?, plur. of Dec. VIII. ^n^):^"?-' , Fut. Kal of fi^'T , with suff =)rr, and the preceding ^ written pletie^ contrary to the usage in ^ri^p"; . Also the Pattahh under the :> , in the Fut. of this verb, is restored and lengthened here, 146, although the accent is Merka, a Conjunctive, 149. b. d^^^awN^, pi. of fi^b , Dec. VIII. LXXVI. Ps. 67: 2, 3. ^DSh"; , yMon-ne-nu, 66. 6, Fut. Kal from i:h , Par. XII., with suff. ^3. . The final Nun of the verb receives a Dag. forte because o( accession, 258. The Hholem in the Fut. ^n; is shortened, because the accent is thrown forward, 129. The Qamets under the praeform. Yodh is dropped, for the PART 11. NOTES ON NOS. LXXVI LXXX. 91 same reason, 138. ^i^.^n^'^') , "j 152. c. 5, for the dropping of Sheva under the Yodh that next follows, see 115. The verb is Fut. Piel, with suff. 12.-. For the dropping of the final Tseri of the verb, see 312. 8. "^i<;; , Fut. apoc. Hiph. of niwN , 206. It agrees with V:s a noun plural, although the verb is singular, 489. T*^, suflf. state oftl':s. T:nJ , compounded of nJ< with^ on^ and nD.. , see Par. in 408. DN with^ and Note. 5. Lit., Let his face shine on w*, i. e. may he look propitiously upon us ! n?,l^ , b 152. 6. 2 ; n^l fern. Inf of 3?'n^ , with penult tone. ^3n^ (for '^SI'll), because of the pause-accent, 148. a. D"]!;!, pi. of "^13, Dec. i. inyVu:-; , with Silluq under the n, 148. a. r^XXVII. Ps. 119: ai. innbs, Kal.Praet. 3 fern, of ^t1:3 , agree- ing with '^pSS ; for Methegh, 66. in E. g. '?;ni>n*v!Jnl: , b prep. ; T^ suff. ; 5 with Methegh after Qamets, 66. under E. g. See also 87. c. "iJs?:, suff. state of Dec. VI. For '^'^^ib, see '^nyJi'rnb above.- "^ri^h^ (for "^Pibh^), with Silluq on the penult, Piel of bh;, 232. 6., Dag. being excluded from the h, ill, and 232. b, ^b3, 3 plur. of Jib3, comp. 118. and Note 3, ^b3 being put for ^-ibs . T^ 5 dual. suff. of "j"? , Dec. VI. 'r^n^TSNb , n with accent, instead of n without one, 148. a. 'ii2i32?t: , Imp. of t:?t2 , 229 seq. ^w^n'l, with accent praepos. although the tone is on the ultimate, 95. ; ^ not 1 , 152, c. 4 ; ^.sn Imp. of nsjn , instead of T\Ntn , 118. '^';i;i3N, No. 80. ^3L5n , with article n , and with a composite accent over the two first letters, 93. No. 1 1. i^-nD^l"' , ye-h^seh-bd^ Fut. Kal of-Dh, Methegh, 87. 0.-13 with Dagh. euphonic in the Beth, 75. a. LXXXHI. Ps. 34: 19. sHp^ , adj. Dec. III., (from n":;^), verb ofexi-^tence implied, 534. 'nS'::: , const, of Niph. Part, from in*i; , the final Qamets in this Part, being pure and mutable , ^r.^^'lr^i 1 regimen, 532, 6.~nXT , 89, also 408. Note 4.-^"'wN:37 , const, pi. of .\5l, 445. s-^c^)-^, Fut. Hiph. of ^'r;, for Pattahh furtive, see 69.' Sentiment: 'The truly humble, Jehovah will aid ; and he will deliver them from danger.' LXXXIV. Ps. 36: 6. tr^:^ir3,, where the art. is retained after PART n. NOTES ON NOS. LXXXIV LXXXIX. 93 thp prep. 3, which is contrary to the more common usage ; comp. 15'2. rt. Note. '^-.p^, 148. a.tiyW, from p^T'iJ , Dec. VI. 6. Sentiment : ' Thy mercy is exceedingly great, thy faithfulness exceeds any hounds which we can measure ;' so the verse that follows, leads us to interpret this passage. LXXXV. Ps. 36: 7. ^np^niii, Dec. XI., the Methegh marks Qamets, 66. e.g; for the accent, see 93. No 22. '^inn , plur. const, of ^nn, Dec. VII. a. Mountains nf God mean, 'very lofty mountains,' 456. e. cinn, comm. gender, fem. here; lili'^ (from i-)) agrees with it. irjin"^ is in the Vocative. ri73ri2, with the accent Rebhia over the Mem, 93. No. 10, Dec. XI. Senti- ment: 'Thy righteousness is very great, thine uprightness is boundless ; thy kindness extends to both man and beast.' LXXXV I. Ps. 36: 8. np'TT^ , mdy-yd-qdr^ how precious! 75. a. 'a'^nb^^ , Voc. "'tS'! , 1 152. c. 4, and 540 ; ^:2 , const, pi. of tl'':2, sing. "jS; . '^^?.;3 ? ^"ff- dual of 5)53 , with comp. accent, and tone on the penult, 336. Par. c ]1";Dn;i, Fut. Kal with ] parag., 211. a. 1 ; also with original Yodh restored, and the preceding vowel lengthened, 147, comp. 146. b. Lit., Under the shadow of thy wings ^ the sons of men find a refuge ; an image borrowed from the pro- tection which fowls afford to their young. LXXXVll. Ps. 37: 23. rtnn;?2 , by Jehovah^ an anomalously pointed word. The Jews read for it, '^^'l^^!^. , with a Tseri un- der the Mem^ as a compensation for Dag. forte omitted in the 5^ , 112. comp. 406. The variation in the punctuation of nin^TS, con- sists merely in putting a simple Sheva under the Yodh, which will not bear the composite one found under 5*, in the word Diw^Tg. .'^i:?:2^, const.pl. Dec. 11. !iD:is, Polel of 113, with composite accent, and with a restored and prolonged vowel under the first Nun, 146. a. V"s^^. i 225. LXXXVllI. Ps. 37:24 Vb-; , Fut. of bS3.~bt31\ Fut. Hoph. ofbiD, with pause-accent, 144. 1. ^"i; , ^^ with suffix. Sentiment: ' Jehovah will uphold and support the righteous, so that they shall not utterly fall.' LXXXIX. Ps. 41:2. !:^3tp?3. Part. Hiph. from bsip. b"?, with pause-accent, from r^ , Dec. VIII. M:?n , Dec. X., "the first Qamets being immutable. 'inqb^:' , Fut. Pie! with suffix; the 94 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. LXXXIX XCII. accent marks the penult tone, 100. y. Sentiment: 'Happy the man who regards, pays attention to (b'^S'IJ^), the poor, i. e. re- lieves their wants and woes ; in the day of adversity Jehovah will deliver him.' XC. Ps. 47: 2, 3. d">73?lri , rj , 152. a. 2. 51D, with Qamets because of Athnahh, 144; Kaph Raphe, 80 12>"^n , with penult tone, 100. ^, Hiph. Imp., from 'J^") in the sense of No. II. r^bl^, proper adj., altus^ the lofty or exalted one^ Dec. I., a title of the Most High^ (as we express it in English). Nni:, Niph. Part, from y^ , is to be feared, 529. b^"J5 , Dec. III. h. XCI. Job 20: 4, 5. nJTn , n interrog. 152. d, used here in the sense of wonne .^ so that, with the word which follows, one must translate. Dost thou not know this ? IJ^'l^"' , with the accent praepos., 95. , but tone on the penult, 100. d. ''3?3 , poetic form of 173 preposition. ^3^ , eternity ; here, ancient times, days of old; the pause-accent does not prolong the vowel here, 149. fi"^^ , Inf. Kal from Q^ip or finil), uSed as a gerundial noun here; "'STa t]'^i25, lit. from the establishing^ placing. ''^y , prep., but with a form like a noun plur. const, of b^ , 407. 6. n:3^, (not nS")), 73. Note 1. lilj^^ , 73 406, lit. from near by ; the meaning is, brief short, of small duration or extent. 5^2h , Bee. v. '^'15? , prep., plur. form of 1!? , 407. fc. ^57 ^or ^51 ? 144. 1. XCII. Job 22: 12,13. ft^btl, nonne? is not? interrog. !n. frna , Dec. VI., with in final moveable, 84. The prep. 2 in, is understood before nn^, 559. Meaning: 'Is not God exalted above all?'~lnN-|, Kal Imp. of inNn . 'y^i^n, Dec. I. in the sing. Q'^qDTS , plur. of Dec. II., Methegh under Kaph, 87. e. !|)3*^ , from n^n , with Silluq. Meaning: 'Behold the summit, height, of the stars, for they are high.' JDnTDN*!, yet thou sayest, 1 yet; the tone of the whole word here, is on the ultimate, 101. a. S^^^-n^ , mdy-yd-dhd, 75. a, lit. How doth God know ? the Praet. being used for the universal Pre- sent, 503. rf nyin , Ji interrog., 152. d. 1. "bS"}??, with tone on the ultimate, 141. Note 2 ; it is one of the few words in Hebrew, whose root consists of more than three letters, and whose com- PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XCII XCIV. pound ingredients are obscure. t:iDUJ^, with 1 fulcrum merely, as the Hholem is pure, 64. Lit., Can he judge behind the darkness? 1. e. ' Is God omniscient ? Are not some things concealed from him?' XCIII. Job 25: 4, 5. p'^St'^-Sl^a i 75. a. lit. How can a man be just with God ? i. e. in his view. bi< , properly the mighty one^ a frequent appellation of God. The regular plur. is not applied to the true God. nsn-n^^ , n 152. c. 4; Dagh. euphonic as above. ^iib"^ , const. Part. pass. Kal, from "Jb; , 531. ln'^i^ , Heteroclite, see Lex. 1^' prep., even to. Hn^ , Dec. V. b'^nti'^ , Hiph. fut. from bJlN in its second sense, to shine, to be splendid^ =^cvj- Meaning: ' Look even to the moon, and its splendor fails,' i.e. in the sight of God, the splendor of this heavenly body is, as it were, noth- ing ; or, ' Its light is comparatively darkness.' d'^^i^TD'J , Methegh under Kaph, 87. e. ^3T , from ^J^T verb yy, Kal Praet. 3 plur. Tri>2, Beth Raphe, 80; VZ'^^^, dual suff. of y^^. Lit., And as to the stars^ they are not pure in his sight ; i. e. the light or splendor of the stars is not pure light in his view. In other words, ' Such is the perfectly pure and holy nature of God, that even the most pure and perfect of all created objects are, when compared with him, impure and imperfect.' "S P|55 , how much more^ see Lex ; or rather, here, surely then. 'i5l2N , poet, appellation, for which ti'iij is employed in prose, Dec. I. in sing., the plur. is irreg. and of Dec. VI. ^ti73^, , 554. t:'iN-]^n, the same as Q'lw^ or xiisN; , 444. d. XCIV. Job 23: 8, 9. Qnj:.^, with Tiphhha anterius, 95, as an adverb here, /ort8;aW. ^bJlfi, Methegh, 87. a, 1st pers. sing. Fut. Kal, with smooth enunciation, 224 ; used as Present, 504 b / the common Fut. here is from *]b; , see Lex. ^SS'^N , suff. 13-. and 'J'^ij , const. pJ5 before a suffix; here an adverb^ taking an epenth. suffix like a verb, 405. Lit. And not he, i. e. he is not there, is not to be found. Nb , Methegh, 87. /. and 87. e. 'j'^^jfi^ , Merka, a conj. accent, here marks the final tone syllable, Fut. of 'J"'3, Par. XIV., used for the Present, 504. b. ib, prep, b af- ter the verb 'J'^nN , 506. 96 PART IT. NOTES ON NOS. XCIV XCV. b\\lp, bi^?^'^, or '^Nia-^:, Aleph in otio^ sfmol, (instead of i^i^73'ii, 118), Dec. I., no plur., Ace. of place, 428. 2. Before V^N^tp, the verb i^HN. is understood, 562. inii^3 , iD is so, 62. 1, n^i^y (for nrii'J, 64), inf. of nipy, 280. seq., 283. 2. Note. in"v!:y3 , when he works or operates^ 521. a ; lit. in his actings in agere ejus. Th^ , out of pause,* THiJi, 1st pers. Fut. of KhI, apo- copate Seg-holate form, see on page 107, far. of forms, D Gutt. apoc. form. The full form would be HTlrtJi , from ~T^T . t attahh is employed in the Segholate form of the verb, because of the Gutturals, 283. Note 3. Lit. / can not see., viz. him ; the Subj. mood being made by the Fut. tense, 203 seq. The pronoun ib , fern, is implied after T^N, 582; for Vr, pron. with preposition, 506.;]*:::^::, 225.]-'^;, Ace. used adverbially, 428, 2. nfi<-).^., Fut. 1st pers. from nJ , Methegh, 87. m. N^TT , >, for the verb of existence, 469. n^d: , const, of Dec. XI. c. """Z':^ , prob. a noun with an old plur. ending, 325. b. b. from TvU , mighty., and so (like tJ'^n rN) a pluralis majestaticus. Q2'*3n , Fut. Hiph. from 1'^'z , t]_ is suffix, 309 under c. The Qamets under the r^ falls away, be- cause the tone is moved forward by the suffix, 133. Meaning: ' Truly there is a spirit in man ; and the inspiration of the Al- mighty has given him understanding ;' i. e. there is an intelligent spirit of divine origin, an inspiration of the Almighty, given to man. So, with Umbreit, would I construe this passage ; and not with Rosenmueller, who makes the two parts of the sentence antithetic; e.g. 'although man has a rational soul, yet God only 13 08 PART II. NOTES ON NOS. XCVIII C. gives him understanding.' Is not understanding given, on the part of heaven, when a rational spirit is given ? t3*3n , majores natu, elders, comp. Gen. 25: 23, where it is op- posed to ^'"J^L ^ junior ; here it is parallel with t;"':|:.t , old men. 'lasn^. , in pause, 144, also rough enunriaiion, 225. n"':pTl , ^ neither > because it follows <": in the preceding oilyug^ 558. Note. =1:"^^;) , Par. XiV. t^E'i;^ , rectitudinem^ what is right. It is the young Elihu, who says this to Job and his friends. His meaning is, that ^ he himself enjoys the inspiration of the Almighty ; but that the persons whom he addresses, are not to be taken for wise men, i.e. for men wiser than himself, because they are older thaa he.' In other words, he claims the right of teaching them, al- though his seniors ; and presumes to do this, on the ground of special divine illumination. XCIX. Job 36: 5, 6. ]r:i , i.e. "jn , 89. ^-23 , with accent praepos., and tone on the ultimate, 95. 6 see in No. 95. ni< sign of Ace. ^7:fi^'^2 , see in No. 95. "^niVj^, Kal Praet. of ":bj^ , tone on the penult, 100./ Note. ;]2'^wL'N, Hiph. Fut. 1st pers. from miL*, the Qamets under the w\ is dropped, because the tone is thrown forward by the suffix ;^_, which is for ^5-, 309. d. 2."'-}^, my hand.^rcyp^ Praet. of filb or D"'!:. i73b, poetic form of b, prep., 'D-iiar , upon my mouth. ^D , Pe Raphe, 80. The suff. % (Yodh pronoun) coalesces with the Yodh of "^D , const, form of n? , 336. Note 3. Meaning : ' I impose silence upon myself PART II. NOTES ON NO. C. 99 n^lN , see in No. 95. "'rins'T , Piel, with tone on the penult, 100. d. although it is not marked, in this case. nsyj^, from n33^, full form of Fut, comp. 283. y. D Gutt. letter /*. a';p'J , dual, fem. of U12V ; prob. t]"ri"i; is for D^n:^; , (Gesenius says, for Q^n:;!;). I take the Dagh. in the Tav, (which is inserted contrary to the rule in 80), to be a kind of compensative Daghesh, 74. b. Note. Pl^pii^, Hiph. Fut. of^lp^. Meaning: ' I have spoken once, viz. with haste or inconsideration ; yea again, or a second time, in like manner; but 1 will do so no more.' The whole expresses the deep sense of vileness and inconsideration, which Job enter- tained with respect to his past character and conduct. PART III. NOTES AND EXPLANATIONS. When the student shall have completed the study of Part II., agreeably to the directions given in the introduction to the Notes on the same; and shall also have reviewed the same in a proper manner; he maybe supposed to have acquired such a knowledge of the forms of Hebrew words, of the method of ^ram- maticaily analy ing them which oughi to be practised, of the manner of employing the grammar for this purpose, and of finding in it what he needs in order to obtain a complete view of the principles of any analysis, that the Notes may, in future, be less copious and particular than they have hitherto been. All this, I repeat it, may be now taken for granted, provided the student has REVIEWED Part 11. in a proper manner. By this I do not mean, the going through with one solitary review, and this a hasty one too, (as is usually the fact) ; but I refer to a review, conducted on the principles which Jahn has laid down, in his Dissertation on the Study of the Oriental Languages ; a piece which, I would hope, will be attentively read by every one in our country, who intends making a serious effort to acquire a knowledge of the He- brew tongue. 1 mean a review., which shall be repeated contin- ually along the way, when the student first goes over with Part II. ; and then again made entire, with respect to the whole of Part II., after Xhejirst reading is completed. With the knowledge thus acquired, the student will come to the study of Part ill., with some good measure of due prepara- tion. Let him not think the time and pains spent on Part 11., to be in any degree lost, or expended in vain. Although he may seem to go slowly, yet he is, by such a method of study, laying PART III. METHOD OP STUDY. 101 the foundation for rapid progress, at some future period of his efforts. Grammatical Ibrms and analyses being once well master- ed, the progress in the Hebrew language will probably be such as to exceed the sanguine expectations of most students. But un- less they are mastered at the outset, there is great probability that they never will be at any future period. In most cases, such is undoubtedly the fact. And if the student, in his subsequent exegetical studies of the Old Testament, finds himself, at every turn. In a state of doubt or uncertainty as to the real grammatical construction and arrangement of any passage; how is it possible, that he should ever be able to acquire a comfortable degree of assurance, that he is right in his conclusions with regard to the meaning of any difficult passage? Suppose he resolves to con- sult commentators, who have a more profound knowledge of grammatical and lexicographal matters than himself; often such commentators disagree ; and then where shall he resort for satis- faction ? Or if they agree, they assign reasons for their opinion, of which his acquisitions do not enable him to judge; then how is he to obtain satisfaction ? All this shews the Importance of laying well the foundation of Hebrew study, and in such a way, that any superstructure can be built upon it, which the future may require ; as has been already said above. Indeed, if there be any object in expending time, and money, and labour, upon the study of Hebrew, that object must be, or ought to be, a truly valuable one. But of what value is a superficial knowledge of the language in question, which neither enables one to interpret skilfully himself, nor duly to appreciate the labours of others who have performed such an otiice ? I would hope, that these brief remarks on this important sub- ject are not out of place, at a time when the student is shaping his course for all his future life, in respect to the study of the Jewish Scriptures. '* Drink deep, or taste not,'*" is advice which may be urged as properly on the young philologist, as on the poet. Indeed, if there be any who have no taste for such studies, and no proper sense of the value of them, and who want nothing more than the name of having studied Hebrew, while 102 PART III. METHOD OF STUDY. they are too indolent or too irresolute to make the acquisitions necessary to understand this language well, then let them keep away from our public Seminaries, where such study is required, and prepare in another way for the ministry, where their sloth and irresolution can be more creditably indulged. There can be but one persuasion, in regard to this whole matter, among all men of sense. Either the acquisition of the Hebrew language is val- uable, or it is not : if it is not, then choose a course of study which supersedes it ; if it is, then study it so as to get something valuable from it; something more than the name of being a He- brew scholar, a name which is not unfrequently bestowed on some, who would find it, in most cases, beyond their power to dis- tinguish a Qamets Hhateph from a Q,amets. Let not the student, then, who is in earnest, deem one hour misspent, which is spent in giving him elementary knowledge that will make him radically acquainted with the nature of the langua2:e which he is studying. Let him patiently pursue the method of thorough analysis, to which I have attempted to intro- duce him in the preceding pages ; and then I can promise him a rich harvest in due time, for all his toil in thus sowing the seed. Those who will not cultivate the soil, nor duly sow the seed, must expect a harvest that will be light ; or at best, a crop of grain, the kernel of which is either shrivelled or blasted. The Notes, for the future, will, as intimated above, be more sparse than heretofore, on account of the reasons stated at the commencement of these remarks. Still, they are intended to leave nothing of an analytical nature unexplained, which one may not now suppose the student able to find out, by his own efforts. The biblical accentuation, for a few of the first Nos., is but partially inserted. It is intended to be employed, only in case the larger pause-accents occur, or a word has the tone on the penult, or there is some special reason (which will be the subject of notice) for inserting it. After these Nos., which reach as far as the end of Gen. ii., the whole train of accents is introduced. The reasons for this will PART III. METHOD OF STUDY. 103 be stated, when I came to the Notes on that part of the sequel, which commences with Gen. iii. 1 would fain hope, that the student will pursue the same thorough course of analysis, in regard to all which is to come, as he has been taught to do, in regard to Part II. In this way, the knowledge which he may have already acquired will be put to the test. The instructer, also, should persevere in the same par- ticularity of demand upon the student, which the nature of the JNotes above has led him to make. In this way, a multitude of difficulties, that must press upon the Hebrew student at any ad- vanced course of inaccurate study in the usual way, will be re- moved in limine^ and gradmilly ; so that he will never be sensible of any loss of time, occasioned by efforts to overcome them. The knowledge necessary to remove them, will thus incorporate itself with all his linguistic acquisitions of the Hebrew, and become a component and necessary part of it. 1 repeat it, and I desire it to be distinctly remembered by every student of Hebrew, who uses this book, that it is much better to master all the dirfficulties^ at an early period^ (and a great saving of time also, if the whole course of study be taken into view), than it is to pass them over^ and defer them to a future opportunity^ -which it is supposed will be more con- venient. Like most procrastinated objects, this, in all probability, will never be obtained, where such a course is taken. NOTES ON PART III. No. I. (2^)* nn-^n , 3 fem. Praet. from ^^fl , Methegh, 6G. e.g. ^nn, tone on the penult, the first accent marking it, 95. 6 ; ^nn, as the tone shews, 100. a, is a Segholate, employed instead of ]7\p., 120. 6; Tav Raphe, 80. nrin, the same throughout, the kind of accent only excepted. ^7^^, hho-shekh^ 62. 2. "^ZS, from 'D'^ZB . nshnTD , Piel Part, fern., Par. XXI. * The Nos. in parentheses denote thq verses in the Hebrew text. 104 PART in. NOTES ON NO. I. Some have supposed that N"^2, in v. 1, means only, ^o dispose^ to arrange^ to form, viz. out of materials already existinpf, to reduce to order. But v. 2 shew*^, that no mere arrangempnt or disposi- tion of matter can he intended hy N'lS; for after the action im- plied by wHn3 had been performed, the earth still remained in a chaotic state. 7'hat the original matter of the heavens was in a similar condition, is evident from vs. 6 8, and 14 19, All or- der and arrangement plainly seem to be considered, by the wri- ter of Gen. 1., as having been effected after the original act of creation. With the apostle, therefore, we may safely believe, that " the worlds were formed by God, so that the things which are seen, were not made from those which do appear, Heb. 11: 3," i.e. were not originally male out of matter already existing. The original act of creation^ n^ uni\erstoo(\ by the sacred writers, appears plainly to have been, the culling of matter into beings the causing (fit to exist ; and out of this, the heavens and the earth were afterwards formed, i.e. reduced to their present order and arrangement. Philosophy may speculate on this, and maintain, with Aristotle, the eternity of matter ; but philosophy can prove nothing on this subject, nor even render such speculations proba- ble, if revelation were out of the question. ^ri^T =]nin, lit. emptiness and desolation.^ or^ empty and void., two synonymous words, of nearly the same import ; and designed therefore to express intensity., 438. d. and Note ; so that the mean- ing here seems to be, '' The earth, in its original state, was alto- gether empty or void,' viz. devoid of the various productions which it afterwards was caused to exhibit. Y^rt") , etc. i. e. no light yet existed, to shine on this empty, desolate D'fnri. This last word seems to denote the abyss of cha- otic elements, out of which the world was formed ; probable root, t^n, to be confused.^ bewildered, D'^^VN! H'l'^^ divine energy or ef- ficacy ; comp. TTi^fv^u in Wahl's Lex. no. 6. b. a. etc. r)Lh-\73 , hovered over.^ brooded over; lit. applied to fowls hovering over their young. It seems here to designate the power or energy of the Creator, which, as it were, brooding over the newly created world, imparted to its elements the power of communicating life PART III. NOTES ON NO. II. 105 and energy to plants, animals, etc.; comp. Geo. 1: 11, fi^UJ'in y"\iln , let the earth cause to spring forth, and v. 12, 7'^.2$rj ^^.^^^^i and the earth did bring forth, viz. plants, trees, etc. Comp. also Gen. 1: 24 seq. where it is stated, that the earth produced animals of various kinds. To this vivifying influence, the DDhn^ of our text seems plainly to refer. b'^Tsn indicates the same thing here as Qiiit^; and so, on the other hand, Qinn is fieqr.ently used for D^^ , see Lex. That the original chaotic mass, from which the earth in its present form was made, exhibited 13"]75 , water, as the predominant ele- ment, appears from Gen. 1:9. The assertion, that C^rrb^ hl"^ brooded "'3E~^:^ , over, on the face of this element, horrows its cos- tume from the action literally indicated by DCh-^Ta . Meaning: 'Divine influence communicated a productive, vivifying power, to the original elements of the earth.' No. II. Gen. I. 35. (3) ^ri% a Segholate apoc. Fut. of n;n , 283. y, k, instead of "^r"^ or "^n"] , 120. b; or instead of the nude apoc. form "^n"] ; comp. the Segholate forms of nouns, in 367 and Par. of Dec. VI. s w. This apoc. Fut. 3 pers. is used instead of the Imp., 201. Note. "'n';T,with Vav conversive, but Dag. omitted in the Yodh, 73. Note 3 ; Methegh here, 87. g. This sentence presents one of the highest instances of moral sublimity, which can be any where found. Longinus has cited it as such, in his work on the Sublime. (4) ^->^"i ^ apoc. Fut. with Vav. conv., from nN^ , 283. /. n. The form is what is called nude, i. e. apocopated without the ad- dition of any furtive vowel to make out a Segholate form; like ^^*2 1 1"!"!! 1 ^PV^ , in the Par. 283. y. The full form would be ^^.yil 1 apoc. Stn^^.i (n in oiio, 57. a), so written instead of ^l-^^/l , for reasons given in the last reference, and in 119. b. But the an- alogical form &-)'l , is changed to Nn^ , because of the 1 in the final syllable, 113; past tense aS to meaning, 208 and 504. c^. bp^!l , 216. 4.-~^Dnn, rj with Patlahh, 152. rr. 3 ; rt with- out Methegh, comp. 87. g. 14 106 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. 11 III. (5) -li*?!: for ^"'Nnb , 152. a. Note. Si"' niJ^^, to the light, day. After a verb of naming (M"^)^), the Hebrews put the object addressed in the Dat. with b , and the name given in the Ace, and govern it by ^nj: . ^'^n^ for *]4;nnr , 152. a. Note. nb^b, lay-Id in pause, ni:^']r out of pause ; n is merely paragogic^ and the original ground form is r^'b , Dec. VI. "^n""^ , see in v. 3. inw\ , for irrN (the const, is IHw^), for N , see 142. a ; for the use of ltlJ< as an ordinal^ see 396. " But could there be day and nighty at this period, when no sun was created ? The heavenly luminaries were not formed, un- til i\\e fourth day; see vs. 14 19." The seeming difficulties involved in this, have led many re- cent critics to deny that the account of the creation, in Gen. i., is any thing more than a kind of philosophical speculation, adorn- ed with a species of poetic costume. ' But here, i. e. in v. 5,' say they, ' the writer has forgotten himself; for he has represented the first, second, and third days as having had a regular existence, before the heavenly luminaries were formed.' That the repre- sentation itself is such as they assert it to be, need not be denied. But that ' the writer forgot himself^ is not equally certain. In Gen. 1:3, 4, light and darkness are distinctly related to have had an existence, before the sun, moon, and stars were cre- ated. All that remains then, to render the fact probable that day and night existed at the same period^ is, to suppose that the same Almighty Creator, who formed the light and the darkness, did cause successive alternations of these, so as to make day and night, before the heavenly luminaries were called into being. Was not the same omnipotence which created the light, competent to ef- fect such an alternation rf it ? That it did not effect it, who is able to prove ? And until it is proved, we may acquiesce in the views of the sacred historian. No. III. Gen. I. 68. (6) ']^!2^, ground-form '7^,n , Dec. VI. n. '^Ji"''; , consists of the Fut. "^n^ ^ as above, joined with I conjunction^ (not *) conver- sive, which takes the vowel Pattahh, 208). The original points PART III. NOTES ON NOS. Ill lY. 1 07 would be thus, Tj"^"] , which is an impossible syllable, 42, comp. 137, and also 152. c. 3. The reason why "^""^t (not '^^^^) is here used, is to connect this word, in construction, with "'n'^ in the pre- ceding clause, and to shew that both stand in the same predica- ment as to meaning. The use of'TT'^i here, would give the sense of, and it was ; which the writer does not mean to say. Q^cb D-tJ 7">3, of the same meanins: as D^73 T-'iai t:*?3 ra; see in v. 4, "^^P^r-j ]"'?.'' ^^V(7\ "{%> So in Deut. 17: 8; comp. al- so in Gen. 1: 7. This use of b after y\ is peculiar, and not ex- plained sufficiently by the Lexicons. Lit. By a separating ('{"'n) of the waters^ in respect to (b) the waters ; i. e. of the waters above the visible expanse of the heaven (i'""'p."j), from those on^ or in, the earth beneath ; comp. v. 7. (7) tJ?2, 283. y. b7.:2^:!, in v. 4. b?^. , compound of )'n and b^ , 407. f y"'pnb b^^. , lit. from the above (the upper part) of the expanse, or, the above in respect to the expanse. (8) D'^'J ?"'j:5"^b, construction after a verb o( callings or nam- ing ; see on v. 5. No. IV. Gen. L 912. (9) ^"li^*^ , ylq-qa-vu^ with the first T moveable, 56. 1, Fut. Niph. of nij? . Slfi^nn*] , ^ as in '>ri'^l , v. 6 ; ni$"^n , Fut. Niph. 3 fem. sing., from ?iN"n ; for n, comp. 111. 112. n.D3^?l, hdy-ydb'bd-shd., Dec. VI. fem., like the Greek >J ^^p. Meaning: 'Let the waters which cover the whole earth' (making it a QSnri), ' be collected into an ocean, or oceans, so that the solid earth may appear.' (10) rtip^'b/\, u-lerniq-ve Jrom ti'ij:>'q , Dec. IX., in const, state. N";^] , see on v. 4. 11. NU;'^^l, Fut. apoc. Hiphil; for Methegh, see 87. h. Comp. V. 2 with this, as to sentiment. liljy , in apposition with ^('^i'^ . y*^-)]??. Part. Hiphil. ''-\2) ySf^ , the tree of fruit, i. e. the fruit-tree. "^ne nujy , yo-^e/j-p^n, 75. a. The accent is placed here on the first syllable in rrirb , because the word is immediately fol- lowed by a tone-syllable, ^is being a monosyllable. i2"'z:b , Vu , Dec. L iy^T "I'^fi?. , whose seed^ 478,-13 , [is] in it, 554. 108 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. IV V. (12). Nifcin] , Vav conversive, and apoc. Fut. Hiphil from N^^. ln_:^72i:, in-, suff. pronoun, see in Par. under 336. "''is-n'rs?, ^O'sep-pfri^ 75. a. But here the accent is removed, by the Maq- qeph whiih follows, 89, making a diiTerence between this and the instance in v. 1 1 above. No. V. Gen. I. 1419. (14) TI*^ , sing. apoc. Fut. (see on v. 3. above), while rinfc^ Is plural ; see Synt. 489 and Note. n-i72 , from n^tX": , Dec. III. ; for the omission of Vav in both the final syllaf)ies, see ^ 63. ^ 65. ^^p-)3, 3 137 ; ?'>jp-) , const, of Dec. III. b''^anb , Inf. Hiph., for form, see 216. 3, and comp. 152. a. Note. I"*-"} , *) conj. giving the Praet. form a Fut. sense, 209. nn^b, from nnN,and tor D^nS^, 63. 65. tl^i^y^D , from "i^i^ , Dec. 11., Munahh on the Mem instead of a Methegh, 87. Note 3, comp. 87. a.'D^ZD , Dec. XI. IVIeaning : 'Let them be for signs which shall distinguish seasons, days, and years.' Lit. Let them be for signs^ even for stated seasons^ and for days and years. (15) "'."T}, see on v. 14. nn^J*2 implied, and mentally brought along from the preceding clause ; for -DN , see 427. nb^4^^^.'^ Dec. Xlll. For the rule of (he day., is a 6gurative expression, de- noting the powerful or predominating influence of the sun by day. So Pliny calls the sun, Coeli rector ; and Cicero, Omnium modera- tor ac dux. niN/S -"nJ^T , as above. ]^t:jvn , the small., i. e. the smallest, or the smaller, 455. a nb^Vn , with parag. n_ , and tone on the penult, 100. i. Q'^qDiDn , Methegh, 87. e. (17) ")Pi'.2, Fut. with T conversive, from ^nj , 254. 2; lit. set PART III. NOTES ON NOS. V VI. 109 or put. QnJt , nfij sigQ of Ace. combined with suff. pronoun tJ.. ; see under 408. (18) i^iZJ^r"), 1 conj. ; b prep. ; and b'd^Q , Inf. construct. Be- fore it, DnN ]n*l is implied ; lit. [and he set them] for ruling. tJ'i'? , for nin2 , 152. a. Note ; lit. by day.^ri\'^\^ , for nbt^nl , ib. i'^'^Sfib , Inf. Hiph., where the contrary practice, viz. that of retaining n, is exhibited, 216. 3. ^f'nn , act. r:, 152. a. 3. (19) ^")!2i V. 4 above. No. VI. Gen. I. 2022. (20) ^^"it^, , 201. Note. yn\y 1^1'ii1, a mode of con- struction exceedingly common in Hebrew, viz. that of joining a verb with its correlate noun, in order to designate intensity^ cer- tainty^ repetition^ etc. Y^.'^ here plainly means, the smaller water animals. H'h "ijc:. , of living or animated breath. As to the meaning of breath {{ov u;b:), see Job 41: 13, an undoubted in- stance ; and nearly as clear is it, in Gen. 1: 30, below. rrti , pro- perly adj., from "^n , Dec. VIII. Meaning: 'Smaller animals which live and breathe ;' or, ' which have the breath of life.' I take yT**P to be in the const, state, before Ji^n TD: . . Pli:?, noun of multitude, no plural, Dec. I. Jj^.i^?"^ , Poel of ^B^, 175 and 262. "'ps-bi' , Rosenmueller renders, versus^ to^ wards ; and he appeals to Ex. 9: 22. 10: 21. Gen. 19: 28, for con- firmation. The meaning thus given is: 'Let the fowl flyover the earth, toward the expanse of heaven ;' or, ' toward the fir- mament above.' On account of the word ^'""p") here, it would seem necessary to acquiesce in this explanation. (21) laj/'sn-, Yodh omitted in the last syllable, 63; lit. sea- monsters, the larger sea-animals. n^nn *i;S[3~b3 , every living be- ing., or living creature^ or living thing ; the two latter Hebrew words designating any thing which has animal or animated life, nip'oSn , rj article for pronoun here, 414. 2. 6. Note ; nipign. Part. fem. Seghol., see in Par. XXI. Dr7p.^^b , sufT. of plur. pron. &n_ , see in 336. >\Z3 , lit. of wing, i. e. every winged fowl, 440. a. (22) '^I'^^.l , 1 Vav convers. without the Dagh. after it, 73. 110 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. VI VII. Note 3; 1^.3"; , with penult tone, 101. 6, and Tseri shortened in the final syllable, 129. a. fin^, see on v. 17. "^TiJib , forntai^b , 119. c. l.lns, 13^ , Imp. Kal. of n"jD , tian , for ^^-)D, ran, 118 and Note S.tir-jra, for D^arJ^a, 152. a. Note, from d; , Dec. VIII. irre^. ; C^a^ seems here to mean, the cavity^ or gulf^ in which the waters of the ocean repose. In the same sense it is plainly used, in Is. 11: 9. Hah. 2: 14; although the Lexicons neglect this sense. an'^ , apoc. Fut. Kal, from Jl^n, 283. y. No. VII. Gen. I. 2431. (24) M2iln, apoc. Fut. Hiph., 3 pers. fern., from N2^ ; for Imp. use, see 201. Note. n"^n '^*c: , generic, every living creature^ an- imal or animated beings. nr'^Ta":: , where the suff. rT_- is sing, be- cause its antecedent is so ; but the meaning is plural, their^ because the antecedent is nomen multitudinis^ 476. a. Note. n^n3, Dec. XI., in apposition with wC: , and governed in the same way ; as are also the two nouns which follow. ii^n3 here means, tame beasts^ cattle ; 'IJ^.TI , reptiles ; and ynN|''in')n , -wild beasts. TD^n , 125. c, instead of n^n reg. const, of n^'n. This form is not un- usual in this noun; e.g. ^'J^ "Tl^t!, "^^^ ^""Itl? "^^^ in^tlietc. But it is not common, in general. Its tone is on the ultimate, as we see in Ps. 104: II ; but in the passage before us, Maqqeph takes away the accent, 89. rirT^b , as before. (25) n^ncin , Methegh, 87. e. (26) n^^?;:, Fut. Kal. 1st plur., from Jii25:^. Most of the ol- der critics find an intimation in this plural, (as they believe), of a plurality of persons in the Godhead. But the evidence seems too doubtful, in this case, to be relied upon. The pluralis majes- iaticus^ or pluralis excellentiae., as it is called, in respect to D"**"! r^i. , '':i6< , D'' OTP , etc. seems now to be generally conceded, 437. 2. That pronouns may be used, and are used, in a similar way, among the Oriental nations, seems to be somewhat certain from the fol- lowing examples; viz. Ezra 4: 18, 'The letter which ye have sent vnto us (^rby Chald.) ;' it is king Artaxerxes who says this. Dan. 2: 36, ' We will tell the interpretation of it ;' it is Daniel who is speaking. So in 1 Mace. 10: 19, 20, king Alexander says, PART III. NOTES ON NO. VII. Ill 'u^xt]x6vtfAev xud^eoTuxuiiifp. In 1 Mace. 11: 31, 33, 34, king Demetrius says, * Ey^uiiiu^nv r]fiMtf iitfjtpafifv iaidxotfifv, X. T.A- In 1 Mace. 15: 9, king Antioehus says, KQUTJiow^fv do^aoofifv. So in John 3: II, Jesus says, oida^uv \akovfA6v iWfjuxuf-tfv. In Mark 4: 30, Jesus says, ufnoKooofifv nugu^a- Xcufiav. In 1 John 1: 4, this apostle says of himself, yguqofifv; and Paul often employs the first person plural. Comp. with nil3y2 above. Gen. 3: 22, ' Like one of m* ;' Gen. 11:7,' Let us go down, and let us confound ;' also Is. 6: 8, ' Who will go for w*.' The passages sometimes adduced, in Gen. 29: 27. Num. 22: 6. Cant. 1: 4. 1 K. 12: 9. 2 Sam. 16: 20. 24: 14, and Job 18: 2, 3, may be all considered as communicative^ i. e. as common to the speaker and his friends, and so do not fairly belong to the above illustra- tions ; although Rosenmueller has adduced the three last passa- ges, in the latest edition of his Commentary on the Pentateuch, a evidence that the plural was used by an individual speaker, and appropriated to himself. It is clear, that this idiom is not common or frequent, in the Old Testament ; it is more common in the Apocrypha, and in the New Testament. In modern times, it is the well known and gen- eral usage of royalty. It is singular, indeed, that kings should employ it for the sake of adding emphasis to their claims of hon- our, while a private individual, in particular one who addresses a public assembly, employs it to avoid the appearance of egotism, or of assuming too much ; a manifest abuse of its original design. Modern usage, however, can not help us to determine the usus loquendi of the Hebrews. So far as this is now discoverable, by the evidence before us respecting the use of the plur. number in the Old Testament, I feel constrained to agree with those crit- ics, who resolve it, on the whole, into the pluralis exceUeniiae. I3tib2a , with suff. ^2- , from ti\:Z , Dee. VL a. The plural 12_ is to be accounted for on the same ground with ^^455;: above. Iini^ns, suff. state of m727 , Dec. L, 13_. as before. Not a few recent critics have maintained, that the writer of Gen. I. believed God to be in reality of the same form with man, i. e. that the writer was an Anthropomorphite. But was Paul one 112 PART III. NOTES ON NO. YII. of this sect, because he says, in 1 Cor. 11: 7, that ' man is the im- age and glory of God ?' and this too, not in reference to his moral qualities, as in Eph. 4: 24. Col. 3: 10. Was Moses, (who, if not the author of the account of creation, yet at least was in all pro- bability the person who inserted it in the Pentateuch), was he a believer in the real physical^ human form of the Divinity ? This same Moses, who, in the second Commandment, has so absolutely and utterly prohibited all resemblances whatever of the Godhead, either to be made, or to be worshipped ? What other motive, but a belief in the spirituality of God, could induce him to do thus ? In a word ; one may well ask, whether there is any more Anthropomorphism in Genesis, than in other parts of the Bible ; and a considerate, fair answer to this question, will enable us to judge of those opinions, which ascribe such childish views of the Supreme Being to the early ages of the world, and in a special manner to the early part of the Hebrew Scriptures. If God ever revealed himself, in any way, to the early progenitors of our race, it is at least essential to suppose, that his spiritual nature was one of the first things which was revealed and understood. How could the idea of a Creator and Governor of the Universe^ consist with the idea of a Divinity limited by a physical form, and of course circumscribed in his operations? The early ages of the world were not so stupid as to be incapable of seeing this ; nor are the monuments left behind of their skill and capacity, such as to warrant us in taxing the people of God with the grossness of Anthropomorphism. In regard to the words fiV^ and niT:?, they stand related in Hebrew, as imago and similUudo do in Latin. They are so nearly synonymous, that they are plainly employed here together, for the sake of intensity or emphasis^ 438. d. Meaning : ' God made man peculiarly in his image, i. e. in a manner altogether distinct from that of other created terrestrial beings.' That this has spe- cial respect to the intellectual, rational, and moral powers, with which man was endowed, and to the consequent pre-eminence or dominion over the lower creation which these gave him, seems to be obvious, when all the passages respecting God and man, in va- PART III. NOTES ON NO. VII. 113 rioiis parts of the Sacred Writingfs, are compared together. His pre-eminence is particularly referred to in what immediate- ly follows. ^lin'^i , *] not conversive, but only connecting the Imp. sense here, with the Imp. sense of niIJy3 in the preceding clause; see on TT^T , v. 6 above. ^7"^^, Fut. of nnn , 201. Note. n^ia IT")^!, the verb taking n prep, after it, 506; Beth Ra- phe, 80; n^^, from n^T , Dec. XI., ^ Raphe, 81. 1. P]i5>5, with prep. :3 , for the same reason that n^^ takes it ; and so in {-!?2r;2n (for n?3n:2nn , 152. a. Note), and in }::rn (bis) in the latter part of the verse; for all have 17")"] implied before them. "iL'Tinn , art. for pronoun, 414. 2. b. Note. The pre-eminence of man over all other terrestrial crea- tures, is clearly and strikingly expressed by this. (27) D^Nn-n^5 , used generkally here, as the plur. pron. Cn5<, at the end of the verse, clearly shews. T73b^3, omitting r\^72i here, which was joined with Cb:! in v. 26. Intensity of expression, however, is here effected, by a repetition of D?.i itself, as follows in the sequel ; see 438. d. inN , him^ see in 408, Par. of nij with Accusative. r;3;^,3 , Dec. XI. The ap- plication of "^^T and rinpD to fi'iNr , shews that this last word is here generic. CnK, see in 408 as above. (28) '^-jn'^T , see on v. 22. Cr^.b , 506. =13^T ^^S, see on V. 22. rruinp"] , "43 with Qibbuts vicarious, instead of T*!;, 41; for the omission of the Vav , 65 ; n , it fem., viz. the earth. ^inn , Imp. of rTi"> ; followed by 3 prep, before the nouns which it governs, as in v. 26. (29) ""rin;, for\^:n:, 254. c. Note. ^nr , Part. act. of :>nt. yas-.r: , art. n ; yy Dec. Vll. 13 i>z,\Nf, in which^ 478. yy"^">S , tree-fruity dendral fruit. ^"^^ ^nT , lit. seeding seed., i. e. producing seed. Meaning : * Every fruit tree, which has the power of propagating itself;' or, ' every one which has the power of producing a regular crop.' nb::?u\b n^rr"; , like the Latin, sit testimonio^ sit decori^ etc. ; nbDJJ , Dec. XII. Because animals are not here mentioned, it has been main- tained by many, that animal food was not originally permitted 15 114 1ART III. NOTES ON NOS. VII VIII. to man, before the flood. But see Gen. 4: 2, 4. Why was Abel a shepherd ? See also Gen. 7: 2, where beasts clean and unclean are distinguished. Does not this probably refer to animals, al- lowed or forbidden to be eaten ? Still, in Eden, our first parents probably did not eat flesh. (.SO) n^n~':Db=l , i. e. "'nn: , from the preceding" verse. """^'rJl , ^zin TH'hich^ as above. n^tJ tJlSD , animal or animated breath; see on v. 20. p";>.^.~b3"TiJl , i. e. "Hin: , / have given ; p"^,^. 'igrass^ vegetation here of the herbaceous kind, as the word Z'^y denotes, which is subjoined as explanatory. The fruit trees, therefore, seem to have been originally giv- en to man, for his nutriment ; and the gramineous, herbaceous substances appropriated to the animals. 31. "IK73 nro, 456. a. No. VIII. Gen. II. 13. (1) ^IaS"^!, 1 conversive Vav, with Dagh. after it omitted, 73. Note 3, comp, 87. g^ which shews that Methegh is usually insert- ed in such cases, although the omission of it is pretty frequent. ^'?r", Pual Fut. of nr3. ti^n'^-bD"; , Rosenm., ' omnes copiae celestes ac terrestres.' But elsewhere, N3i: , in connexion with ]";^wj , always refers to the stars; and so 1 take it here; as in Neb. 9: 6. (2) b^-^^i , 2 as before in v. 1 ; i:!?": , Fut. apoc. Piel, for n^.^^ , 286. 2. The Dagh. is not retained in the V, after apocope, be- cause h becomes a final letter, 72. iripwNr72 , suff". state of r:D^:?:3 (for n^.x:;: 1I8 and Note 2), Dec. Xl./. hs-J^l i is spoken more humano ; as indeed every thing which we say, or can say, of God, must, in a greater or less degree, be spoken more humano^ or (Xf{> 00)77 OTjaxym^. Meaning: 'At the end of six days, God ceased to create ;' or, ' he refrained from creating;' 1. e. on the seventh day he rested. The Septuagint reading here, iv tfj ri^t- Q(x jij ttT7]^ and the Samaritan Peutateuch which agrees with it, are evidently the result of some transcriber's fears, lest work- ing on the seventh day should be attributed to the Creator. But what just ground of fear is there, when the writer expressly af- PART III. NOTES ON NO. VIII. 115 firms, that God on the seventh day, had completed (bs*) his work ; for that this is the sense of b?"] , 504. c, is clear from ns*i;^2 ^tc-j which follows. (3) '7?;37;; , see 208. e. g. Meaning : ^ God declared this day to be worthy of peculiar distinction, honour, and observance.' So the sequel explains it; 'ii'^.j^^T (208. e.g.), and net it upart^ con- secrated it to a special and sacred use ; such is the meaning of u;'7|T ; Greek, aqo^jlCftv. t^, on it^ during it. niir^'b . . . '^**y^l which he had created in respect to making; i.e. which he had created and made ; or, which he had formed by assiduous opera- tion. Comp. Ecc. 2: 11, for a like expression. The phraseology is unusual ; but the meaning does not seem to be obscure. As a comment on the sense of '7'?.^?! and 'i;".}:^! here, read Ex. 20: 811. The efforts made by recent critics and geologists, to explain away the account here given of creation, or to explain it so as to accord with their respective theories, are well known to every critical reader. The ratio loci et temporis does not permit me to enter into a particular examination of them here. A few hints are all that 1 shall give. The account of the creation, in Gen. I. II., has been represent- ed as a song, a ^v{>og^ a philosophem, i. e. a philosophical specu- lation about the origin of the universe, and (more prevailingly) of late, among a certain class of critics, as a kind of semi-poetic fivd^o^^ philosophic in its speculative origin, but adorned with po- pular tradition as to its various particulars. Even Rosenmueller, in the latest edition of his Commentary on the Pentateuch, more than intimates, that the cosmogony of Moses is to be interpreted on the like principles with that of Hesiod, (Vol. I. p. 58) ; that the division of the work of creation into a period of Wx days, and the declaration respecting the sanctification of the seventh^ was made by Moses only to give currency to his law respecting the Sab- bath, p. 59. And in the sequel he declares his belief, that Mo- ses borrowed his cosmogony from the Egyptians. The difl&culties alleged to lie in the way, by critics who be- 116 PART HI. NOTES ON NO. VIII. long to this class, are, that the writer of the cosmogony in Gene- sis helievps the earth to be the centre of the universe, and that the sun, moon, and all the heavenly bodies are merely subservi- ent to it ; that one day, and one only [the fourth], suffices to form all the myriads of suns and planetary worlds, while fve days are occupied with the formation of the earth, (which shews the igno- rance of the writer in question respecting the real nature of the universe) ; that the clouds and sky are represented as a solid ex- panse above us, holding one division of the waters in its bosom, Gen. 1: 7; that days and niprhts are represented as having an ex- istence, before the heavenly bodies were created which occasion them; that not only vegetal)les, but even animals, spring from the earth, Gen. 1: 11, 12, 20, 24 ; and, in a word, that the whole ac- count has a mythic air, a costume which tradition and speculation have evidently put upon it. All these and the like obiections have been variously, often, earnestly, and copiously urged by critics ; while geologists have united in endeavouring to shew, in various ways, and by a great variety of theories and by appeal to phenomena, that the earth must have been several thousand years in forming; or, at least, it must have been made out of the ruins of another world. Even Dathe has embraced this last con- jecture, and defends it in his translation and notes. If a satisfactory answer can be given to all these objections and difficulties, still it would take a volume to make it out. After all too, one may well conclude with the apostle in Heb. 11: 3, that ' faith' is necessary, in order to believe that the worlds were created, agreeably to the Scriptural account. My own view of the Mosaic cosmogony I can state in a few words. If it does not agree with sound principles of interpreting Scripture, let it be rejected. I believe the account in Gen. I., to be an account of matters of fact^ of real verities ; not a mere philosophical or poetical spec- ulation or |t//'i9o ^'t- f'^''' " H'^^'^g or animated being ; a periphrasis often employed by the Hebrews, in connexion with the verb of existence, when it signifies he be- came., it became. (8) :?ss*2 > ft'oin ^^^ ? ^""t. 235. tDTlVN ilin^ , an appellation of God, never employed in Gen. I., but uniformly used in Gen. II., and nearly so in Gen. III. A like distinction obtains, in many other parts of the book of Genesis. From this it has been argu- ed, by late critics, that this book is made up of records earlier than the time in which the author of the Pentateuch lived, and compo- sed by different persons ; a supposition which has some external evidence in the book of Genesis to favour it. On the supposition that these ancient records were introduced by Moses himself, the authenticity of the book remains untouched by this critical opin- ion. '\-X , Dec. VIII. The etymology would naturally lead to the idea of aw enclosed place., (]:ai protegere) ; but this is not necessari- ly attached to the idea of "j^ . l"!:* , here prop, name ; comp. 2 K. 19: 12. Is. 37: 12. Ezek. 27: 23, (where it is pointed p.!?., however, but this only determines the views of the Rabbinical Punctators) ; in all which places it is mentioned along with Ha- ran (ph), a town of Mesopotamia, Gen. 11: 31, 32. 12: 5. 23: 43 ; and therefore Eden was probably at no great distance from Haran. See also Amos 1: 5, which probably refers to an Eden in Syria. That Eden means a country or tract of land here, is ev- ident from Gen. 4: 16. The word is used figuratively, in allusion to the garden here described, in Is. 51: 3. Ezek. 28: 13. 31: 9. Joel 2: 3 ; in the three former cases it is accompanied by the parallel or epexegetical phrase, ' garden of the Lord.' nnp.^ , of the eastern country, {72 prep, often makes a periphra- sis of the Gen.), or toward the east., eastward^ at the east., Gen. 12: 8 bis ; so ^52173 northward., Judg. 7: 1. tJilJ^T , apoc. Fut. Hiph. PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 121 of fii^, with tone retracted and vowel shortened, 270. c. 3, comp. 208. Note 2. 9. tiy2'2Z2 ', apc. Fut. Hiph. with Gutt, 236. n?3h: , Part. Nlph. ; for pointing-, see 225. t*>N")^ "^-^n?, i pleasant to the sight. !:Si<73 , Dec. II. Q'^^.nn y^") , in the same construction with the preceding y^'. , and governed by ln7^i^i implied. Meaning: 'The tree which preserves life ;' or, ' The tree of which he that eateth shall live, and not die;' comp. Gen. 3: 22. i'Ti n^i: r\^'^Tj yy , the tree of knowing good and evil, ri^y'lln , fem. Inf noun, used as a verbal from S?*!^ . The meaning has been greatly contested. Rosenm. contends that the meaning here is the same, as when applied to infants, in order to designate their entire ignorance; and he refers to Deut. 1: 39. Is. 7: 16. Jonah 4: 11. The two last cases, however, are quite different as to the manner of expression ; and there remains only one, viz. Deut. 1: 39, to compare with our phrase. But that the meaning is the same in the latter instance, as in the former, appears to be con- tradicted by all the context preceding and succeeding, as well as by the nature of the case. Was man, made in the image of God^ at first as ignorant as an infant ? How then did he preserve him- self? Or how could he understand his moral relations to his Cre- ator; and how be guilty for not obeying a command, the nature of which he was incapable of understanding? Must we suppose the writer of our history to be so weak, as to put all these things together ? Then what crime could there be in attaining such a knowledge, as would enable one nicely to distinguish between moral good and evil ? Has it not always been, and must it not always be, a vir- tue in the intelligent and moral creatures of God to do this? There remains then but one rational supposition, in regard to the meaning of our phrase. This is, that by the knowledge of good and evil is meant, ' a knowledge of the difference or distinc- tion between happiness and misery,' (as good and evil very com- monly signify in the Scriptures, e.g. Is. 3: 10, 11, et. al. saepe) ; i. e. man, by eating the forbidden fruit, came to know the differ- ence between happiness and misery ;' or, ' the eating of the fruit 16 122 PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. which was prohibited, occasioned him to know, by unhappy ex- perience, the difference between a state of happiness and one of misery.' This explanation plainly accords with the nature of the whole transaction, and with what ensued upon eating the fruit of the tree in question. The name, then, considered in this point of view, is quite intelligible and significant; is it so in any other? The words of the tempter (Gen. 3: 5), whose object it was to deceive, can not be justly alleged against this hiterpretation ; nor do the words of .Jehovah, in Gen. 3: 22, make against it, for they are evidently of the nature of solemn irony, with allusion to the deception of the tempter, as recorded in Gen. 3: 5. (10) !^{^^ , issued., 621. b. ]iy7j , i.e. from some part of the re- gion called Eden. n^pu^rib , Inf. Hiph. with n praefix retained, 216. 3. It is plain, that the river flowed through the garden, where our first parents were placed ; and this, before its stream was disparted ; i. e. one stream only watered Paradise. t3*^:a/l , and thence., which may refer either to "J^ , or to the region in which it was, viz. ]n:s> . Rosenm. refers it to "j^ , (Alterthums- kunde I. 192); but it is equally agreeable to usage in this case, to refer it to ]iy ; and some may prefer this here. n^.D"' , Fut. Niph., used as the Praeter by virtue of the Vav be- fore the preceding word, connected with it and with the preced- ing N'.^/^ ; comp. 503. Note 1. n^nii*^, 459. D""4JNn , sources, heads, here river-heads or sources; comp. v. 13, where "^n: is sub- stituted for u;i^-i. (11) inwNtn, 465. y'^'B^ the Phasis., as Rosenmueller and oth- ers suppose, a river of Colchis, running into the east end of the Black Sea. Taking off the endings is and ]i_, we have the same radicals (iTC) in both words. Xenophon, however, in his Anaba- sis, IV. 6, mentions a Phasis with which he met, farther south, and which must be, as it would seem, either the present Kur (Cyrus), or the Aras or Araxes. I regard the former as the more proba- ble ; because the Araxes seems to be the Gihon, mentioned in v. 13. The Kur takes its rise, if we may credit the best maps, in the northern part of Armenia, and running first northward, and then eastward, either passes through or grazes upon, the ancient PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 123 Colchis, or Havilah. It finaly unites with the Araxes, and both empty into the south-western part of the Caspian Lake. aasn, ti art. for pronoun, 414. 2. b. Note. This word is usu- ally construed as meaning", to encompass, tojlow round on the mar- gin of ; but it plainly signifies, also, to pass through^ to wind one's way through^ as Is. 23: 16. 1 Sam. 7: 16 clearly shew. This sense of the word may be applied either to the Kur, or to the northern Phasis, both of which pass through Havilah, i. e. the country of Col- chis; or it may be applied to the Kur, which also^rze* upon^ encom- passes^ a part of Havilah or Colchis. ?7!:'^Thr7 , prob. Colchis; which was rich in gold ; e.g. Jason went thither after the golden fleece, i. e. gold caught in fleeces, gold separated from the waters of the Phasis by means of them. Colchis, no doubt, like all the early countries of Nomades and predatory hordes, was not a definitely bounded country. It lies at the east end of the Black Sea. fiUJ lUJfti , where^ 478. b. (12) Jin?l (for ^''rrri, see 165. t. /), the same w, 469. nbl^n , BdeXUoi/^ bdellium^ a gum used as incense for burning^ and of an aromatic smell. Dn^ , prob. the onyx. So Rosenm> h 209. Alterth. (13) 'jTtT'i} , not improbably the Araxes or Aras ; which the Persians still call, (J^r^j (J^2^a^^ Gihon el Ras.---^^^:^n , en- compasses^ or winds its way through ; see on v. 11. Which of these senses it bears here, must depend on the situation of 'L13, in res- pect to the river in question. dl3, Cash or Kmh.. But where is Cush ? ' In the narrower sense,' says Gesenius, ' it means Ethiopia, i. e. the southern part of Arabia, or Ethiopia in Africa, which was a colony of the former ; as the language shews.' But Ethiopia, in the widest sense, both Gesenius and Rosenmueller represent as equivalent to Southern Country^ Torrid Zone^ i. e. the region inhabited by people of colour ; and both avow that there is an entire want of geographical accuracy in the Scriptural account of the local situation of Paradise. ' How could Gihon,' (the Oxus, as Rosenmueller and others sup^ 1554 PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. pose, which running from the remote eastern country, empties it- self into the south-eastern part of the Caspian Lake), ' how could this stream encompass the South-Land, or Ethiopia, or Southern Arabia ?' Fully to discuss these difficult problems of ancient geography, here, would be out of place. But as affirmations of this nature, on the part of such acute, learned, and distinguished critics as Ge- senius and Rosenmueller, have a strong tendency to undermine the belief of the young inquirer, in the accuracy of the sacred historians, I shall suggest a few reasons, very briefly, why one may still believe, with the older critics, that there wasaCush Oriental^ as well as a Cush Southern. (1) The very general custom in all ages, early and late, of naming places after distinguished persons, will be allowed.* Now Cush was the eldest son of Ham, (Gen. 10: 1. 1 Chron. 1:8); and the fither of Nimrod, the founder of the Babylonian empire, and of its great cities; the founder also of Nineveh, Rehoboth, Calah, and Resen, in Assyria ; see Gen. 10: 8 12. In v. U, the render- ing should be, (as it is in the margin of our English bibles). He [Nimrod] went out of that land [viz. Babylon], into Assyria^ "^^3^, Ace. adverbial of place, 428. a. So Rosenm. in Alterthumskunde, Th. II. p. 94. The father of such a distinguished founder of em- pires and cities, which were the wonder of all succeeding ages, must himself have been entitled to distinction in this respect ; not to mention, that he was a grandson of Noah. Had he no region or place in the East, named after him by such a son as Nimrod ? (2) Among the people, whom the king of Assyria transported to the land of Israel, after he had conquered the ten tribes, and carried them away to Halah, Habor, the river Gozan, and the cities of the Modes, (i.e. to the northern part of Assyria and to Media), is one named n^D "^"^^^ti:?, rneyi of Cuth^ 2 K. 17: 30; also written nn^S , in 2 K. 17: 24. These are, in both places, men- tioned in connexion with Babylonians^ b^^'2 "^'^^i^ , who accompa- nied them. The idol which they worshipped, is named b^"):,.2 K. * Rosenmueller says, that most of the names in Gen. X. are names of countries^ as well as of persons. Alterth. II. p. 94. PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 125 17: 30 ; plainly an oriental name, (not a Shemitish one), a ap- pears in the proper names of the princes of Babylon, Nergal- Sharezer, Jer. 39: 3, 13, (also in Neriglissor, who slew Evilme- rodach and mounted the throne of Babylon). n^D-"'*d3N , the CuTHiTES, then, were an oriental people. Now ni3and ':j'!\3 may evidently be nothing more than the Aramaean and Hebrew foims of the same word; inasmuch as the Hebrew UJ not unfrequently is lisped, i e. is prononnced n in the Aramaean. For example, the Hebrew "iliN , Assyria, by the Syrians and Chaldeans was called "i^riN ; by the Arabians, (/J*-^' *^tur ; and hence, by the Greeks and Romaus, Aturia. That the Cuthites or Cushites, transplanted from the east, were the most considerable of all the colonies which the king of Assy- ria placed in Samaria, is evident from the fact, that they gave name afterwards to the whole people of Samaria ; for the Jews, ever since, have called the Samaritans Cuthites, t]'^nl3 or d^^n3 . There were, then, oriental Cuthites or Cushites. (3) Moses Choronensis, a native of Armenia, and who, in the fifth Century, wrote the history of that country, still extant, in his Geography appended to this work by the Whistons, includes all the country east of the Tigris, from the Caspian lake down to the Persian Gulph, under the name of Cush. Media he calls, Chushi-Capcoch ; Elymnis, Chushi-Chorasan ; Persia, Chushi- Nemroz, and under Elymais he reckons a province named Chu- sastan, p.363. As there is no ground to dispute either the knowledge or the veracity of this historian, in respect to such a subject ; and as this testimony reaches very far back, and shews the wide preva- lence of the oriental generic name Cush^ among the ancients who were natives of the east ; so is it plain, that an oriental Cush is not merely ideal. (4) Chusistan, i. e. Cush country^ is still the name of a province, on the east of the Tigris and of ancient Babylonia ; although the Arabians appear to have changed the original orthography of the word. (5) The author of our history has referred to countries and places certainly known, as serving to confirm his account, and to 126 PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. put his readers in possession of definite views, respecting the sit- uation of Eden. Would he venture to naix fable with truth, in a thing of this nature so easily contradicted by any oriental travel- er ? Did he not know to what he referred ? Did not the original ancestors of the Jews spring from the East? Did not Jacob live there many years ? Gould it be a mere conjecture with him, (and with his descendents), whether there was a Gush in that region? (6) After a lapse of more than 3000 years, can the present names of places or rivers be adduced, in order to confute the ac- count of Moses? (7) The acknowledged geographical accuracy (in the popular sense) of the Scriptures in general, makes very much against the supposition of Gesenius, Rosenmueller, and many others, that our author has here committed great mistakes, in his account of Par- adise, and that the whole is a mere fiv&og. Is it the manner of those who write fiv&oc^ to describe locality in the way here prac- tised ? I will only add, that understanding Gush of Gushi-Gapcoch, i. e. the northern part of the region between the Gaspian Lake and the Persian Gulph ; and supposing the Gihon to be the Arax- es ; then does this river encompass Gush. There need be no fiv- dog supposed here. (14) bjv'^h, the Tigris. The h is prob. prefixed to make the quadrili^e^al, as in n!:;itnh i -^jn? C^s^'iJh , etc. In Aramaean, Digla^ and Diglath ; in Arab. Diglath^ in the Pehlvi, Zedschera. n?3*1p , eastward^ in the eastern part qf.^ or before^ which how- ever is equivalent to the other meanings. ' But how could the writer say thus? Assyria lies beyond the Tigris, which makes its western border, not its eastern one.' To which Rosenm., as often in other parts of this description of the lo- cal situation of Paradise, answers, that 'this description results man- ifestly from the ignorance of our author, in respect to the geogra- phy of the places named.' The same has been affirmed by many other late critics. But is not Assyria, as a province, to be distinguished from As- PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. 127 Syria as a kingdom ? Passing over the extravagant and contradic- tory accounts of Herodotus and Ctesias, in regard to the early history of this monarchy, so much may be inferred from them and from the Scriptures, that Assyria did, very early, attain great political eminence, and push far and wide its conquests. Was not Nimrod of a character to do this? In Moses' time, we find Ba- laam adverting to the conquests of this powerful monarchy. Num. 24: 22. In David's time, they are reckoned among his enemies, and ranked with neighboring nations, Ps. 84: 9. Of course they must then have been in possession of Syria ; or at legist, of a part of it. Was not the Tigris, then, on the east^ or in the eastern part of Assyria viewed as a kingdom ? And will not this view com- pare with that which Balaam takes, in Num. 24: 22? Indeed, Rosenm. concedes the above facts, in Alterth. II. 103 seq. ; what need then of fivitog here? Moreover, the limits which he so confidently puts to Assyria as a province, are far from being certain, when applied to the time of Moses. Diodorus Siculus places Niniveh on the Euphra- tes^ as Ctesias (from whom he drew) had done before him ; and even the acute and learned Mannert, places it on the west of the Tigris. Is it so certain, then, that Moses knew not what he was saying, when he said that ' the Tigris runneth ^^Vsi^N ri^ip , on the east of Assyria ?' How difficult to convict one of geogra- phical error, who wrote more than 3000 years ago ! nns,//ie Euphrates^ which being nearer, and better known,, than any of the rivers before named, is not described by a parti- cular reference to country, as in the other cases. (15) nji'.T , Fut. ofTji):^ ,^T[riUli2 , Fut. Hiph. from hr, 251. Yodh between the last two radicals is dropped, 65 ; =)ri_ ver- bal suff. with penult tone, 309. "j^l , Beth Raphe, 80. n'lnrb , Inf withsuflf. rr^ ; see in Par. XXll., and comp. 312. 4. nn^u;bl , ibid. It may be noted, here, that it was ohviously the design of the Creator, that man should be active, and should labour, even in the pardisaical state. Labour itself is not a part of the curse 128 PART III. NOTES ON NO. IX. which followed the apostasy ; but labouring" with toil and sorrow, and labouring to cultivate ground which is comparatively barren, is apart of the curse. Gen. 3: 17 19. From the view given above, of the rivers which issued from Eden, (which in its general features resembles that given by Re- hnd and Calmet), it appears, that there is no necessity of suppo- sing the description of the locality of Eden to be a mere f-wd^og^ as most of the recent German critics have done. Rosenmueller says, '' From the description given in Gen. II., to endeavour to make out the locality of Paradise, idem esse videtur^ atque Virgilii de Elysio phaniasmata (Eneid. VI. 637 seq.) ad veritatem revocare ;''^ Comm. in Gen. 2: 10. Yet it is a fact, that four great rivers do take their rise in the region of Armenia, viz. the Kur, the Arax- es, the Euphrates and the Tigris. It is a ffict, that the sources of all four, at present, are in the neighborhood of each other, in the middle region of Armenia, and at no great distance from Ararat. There seems, then, to be no important difficulty in the way of admitting, that the countries, on which they are said by our au- thor to gr^ize, or through which they wind their way, are coun- tries correctly designated, according to the geography of the day. Indeed, the very nature of the appeal, on the part of the writer, to the productions of the country, e.g. to the gold and bdellium and onyx of Havilah, of itself shews, that he felt himself secure against the imputation of Jiction. Only one important circum- stance remains. This is, that the four rivers just named, do not, at present, flow from one source, but are some 30 or 40 miles apart. This, no doubt, must be admitted, as things now are. But if the history of the deluge be not also a ^virog, (and I am aware that the critics in question believe it to be so, yet geology is proceeding now to overthrow their position), then is it certain that no very important objection to the accuracy of our author can be drawn from this. That important changes must have been made by the deluge, in the face of the earth, in the courses of rivers, and in the plainness or unevenness of the surface of ev- ery country, needs not to be demonstrated. Moses does not say, PART Hr. NOTES ON NO. X. 129 that at the time when he is writing, the four rivers which he names were flowing from one source ; he merely avers, that orig- inally they did so. The possibility of this, considering the pre- sent proximity of these rivers, and the changes that a deluge must have made, cannot well be denied. The probability rests mainly on the credit of the writer. Those who believe that he was divinely guided, may safely believe that he has given us something different from a fable, (like that respecting the garden of the Hosperides), in his account of Paradise. They may be- lieve that there was a grand river-source in the Armenian coun- try, (the ancient Eden), from which issued a stream, on whose banks the garden of Eden was situated ; and that after this stream had wound its way through the garden, it became disparted, and running in different directions, gave rise to four large rivers. Where so much is known to be true, both in respect to the exis- tence of such rivers, and (I believe I may add) in regard to the countries named, we may, all things considered, believe the rest on the credibility of the writer of our account, without being just- ly liable to the imputation of any inordinate credulity. (IG) l^:";} , vd-yttsdv^ I without Daghesh after it, 208 in e. g. ; n^"; , apoc. Fut. Piel, Dag. omitted in Vav, because it comes to be a final letter, 72, comp. also 286. 2 'itaN^ , 119. c. 1. larr , art. 412. a. -b^Nn ^DN, Inf abs. with a finite tense, 514. b.c. (17) p:72=l, 1 152. c. 4; X: 112. y-jT, 1 152. c. 3. For the whole phrase, see on v. 9 above. bDi<{n, Fut. with Pattahh here, in the verse preceding it has a Tseri ; see Par. VII. 137373 , i. e. ^n "j72 "jTa , the first Nun is assimilated with Mem, the second cau- ses the T\ of the pronoun to be assimilated with it ; see in 309. (i, and comp. 407. Note, also 407. f. man ni23 , Inf abs. with finite tense of the same verb, 514. 6. No. X. Gen. II. 1825. (18) lllb .... niC2 b , lit. not good [is] the being of the man, in his separation^ i. e. by himself, in his solitude. ni'^n , Inf. const. 17 130 PART III. NOTES ON NO. X. of H'^'r , as a noun in reg. with t'l^rj which follows. ^'7nb , lit. in his separation, with ^ prep, and 13 noun of Dec. Vlll., but unit- ed they are used as a prep., 407. c i>-nt;:?wNt , i^e-^^sel-l6^ with Dagh. euphonic or conjunctive, 75. a, 1 pers. Fut. Kal from Jlt:y . ^"^.; 3 , suff. form of ^^: , Sept. xar' i;roV, and in v. 20 they render the same word, ofwwg uvzro ; rightly as to the sense, which is, according to that which is the counterpart to him^ or ac- cording to that which corresponds to him. The fanciful (not to say shameful) comment, put on this word by Schultens, and after him by Rosenmueller and others, but rejected by Gesenius, may be seen in Rosenm. Comm. in loc. and in several of the Lexicons. (19) "ilS'^^i apoc. Fut. Kal, almost the only one which has a penult Hhireq and an ultimate Tseri, which becomes Seghol here because the accent is retracted, 129. a, comp. 244.6; us- ed as Pluperfect here, had formed. "*i;f'n D^ti-bs n^'iNn-]72 , comp. the sentiment with Gen. 1: 24, 25. tl";^U?n qiSJ-'r^S niil , i. e. God formed, !iin^ '^^.'^.l If the clause nTziwNn"]^ is also implied here, there would seem to be a discrepancy between this and Gen. 1: 20, 21. Nn-^^l, apoc. Fut. Hiph. Par. XX. nifi<-ir, for the seeing., in order to see^ from n^n . N^^p^""^, 75. a. V^, Dat. of the thing called; see on "li^r in No. II. v. 5. n^h UJD:, in apposition with ib, which is here anticipative, 474 second clause. The prep, b is implied before n^h '*^?.?. '"^"^V t *"ff* state oft]"^, Dec. yii. (20) i^Db , Dat. after i<";p^T , as above. &ti: , one did not Jind^ there was not found., 500. '^'i: nt:?, see on v. 18. What is here stated implies, of course, the full persuasion of the writer, that language or speech belonged to man at the tirst, as an attribute of his being. It did not arise merely from the mutual intercourse of human beings; for Adam is here represent- ed as having given names to animals, before the creation of Eve. Indeed, I am not able to see why it is not as probable, that the gift of language was one with which the Creator originally en- dowed the progenitors of the human race, as that he endowed PART III. NOTES ON NO. X. ISM them with understanding and reason. Articulate speech is as much a peculiar characteristic of human nature, in its maturity as either of these attributes. And that the first pair were not created infants^ needs no proof but a consideration of the nature of the case. We might as well suppose, that the first oaks were only acorns when created ; that all the first vegetables were only seeds ; and that all these grew up to maturity afterwards. If so, how in the mean time did man and animals get their sustenance ? Or how did our infant parents, and the young of animals, provide for themselves this sustenance, if any were to be had ? The idea, so often repeated by some late philosophers and critics, that our first parents were formed with merely the powers of speaking articulate language, which they improved and exten- ed by first imitating noises made by the brute creation, is nothing less than maintaining, that the Creator, who made man in his own image, left him in a state less finished than he did the brutes ; and that he consulted, or provided for, neither his wants nor his dig- nity. Believe this whoever will ; for myself I must believe, that man, recent from the hands of his Creator, and with Hie image of the Eternal enstamped upon him, was more perfect than any of his degenerate posterity have ever been, in all those powers which make our nature superior to that of the lower creation around us. (21) b5^5, apoc. Fut. Hiph. of^D3, used here in the genuine causative sense of this conjugation, 185. b. 1, comp. also 206. Note 1. n73'7ir!, Dec. XI. ]^"''.l, for vowels, see 244. b; for the effect of the pause-accent, 144. I.; for the tone on the final syl- lable, see 101. b. Note 2. c. hjv'^l , with tone on the ultimate, see 101. b. under e.g., the penult here not being a simple sylla- ble, i. e. not ending in a vowel. nni< for nnm, fem. of "lhft$, 107. 2. l^'n^bst, Dec. V. i; here the fem. form of the plur. is used, 327. 2. Sap^i , tone on the ultimate, 101. 6 under e. g. n^I^i^r), compounded of nhPi, a prep, like a noun of Dec. VI., 407. Note, also 407. a. (22) ^'^^^ 283. /. nmb , comp. 511. Note, and 512. 132 PART III. NOTES ON NO. X. ni^n":_ , 1 208 under e. g, ; *. instead of ; , 133 ; S for ""n , 63 ; ri^. verbal suffix, 309 column c. (28) a^'sn , haec vicis^ this time^ iiow^ the art. rj makes it de- finitely to relate to the time or occasion then extant ; Ace. of time, 428. 2. and c. '72:^^'73, plural suff. sttite of wz:;,. n^''^, fem. of "iJ\>l , by contracting the long vowel of the masculine form ; others take it for nU/3N , fem. of \:;:n . So the old Latins, vir a man^ vira a woman.' )l^p V i ^^^^ '^ fem. Praet., instead of inhpb, 51- Note; for Methegh, 82.^, but here the p does not necessarily exclude the Dagh. forte, it is only an arbitrary exclu- sion, to which the principles of a necessary one are extended, so far as Methegh is concerned. n^JT with Dagh. conjunctive, 75. (24) -nt^;2 , ya-^'^zbhh^ short O, 89, T2^ , Par. XXIV. No. II. i72N, suff. state of dN, Dec. VIll , 130. c. o. pn^T , with a Fut. sense, because i connects it to the preceding l?^*] which has such a sense, 209. i n;L't<2 , 506; Dec. Xlll. c 'T'n') , with a Fut. sense, 209. I'linb , Dat. after rrr\ in the sense of become; which is the usual construction. (25) tri-':\p , dual suff. of Q^rr . ts^ainy , plur. of nin:^, Dec. VIII, vowels as in Dec. III. The Shureq here remains in a mix^d syllable, 31. Note 3. The usual method of orthography would be, lD"'/2nJ';. For the shortening of the i in the ground form here, into =1 , see 127. Exc. 1. 346. 3. 270. 6. 1.352. 3. The asterisk is designed to refer to the note at the bottom of the page; which is a Masoretic remark, and lit. translated means, Daghesk after Shureq. The design is, to note this as a singularity ; or, at least, as an usage which is not frequent. Vi^oizn']', Hithpolel of tlj^a, of the class final Hholem, 270. under a, 1 ; it has Fut. Pat- tahh in Hithpolel, viz. 'wibisn"; ; for the effect of the pause-accent here, see 146. This whole account of naming the animals, and of the forma- tion of woman, is regarded by Rasenmueller, Gesenias, and many other interpreters, as a mere ^ivOog; pleasantly devised, indeed, and ingenious as to the execution, as some of them concede. But if there be a God, who created the world, made man in bis own PART III. NOTES ON NO. X. 13S image, ami endowed him with the gift of speech, it was not un- worthy of him to call that gift into exercise. If that God made a ' help meet' for solitary man, there is nothing unbecoming with respect to his dignity and wisdom, in the supposition that he did form woman from man as here related, in order to constitute an indissoluble tie of endearing connexion between the sexes in this way, and for this very purpose. The question, whether he could not have inspired the sexes with the same feelings, in some other way, may be sufficiently answered, by asking. How will the critics in question prove to us, that divine wisdom could not, and did not, choose this way of doing it ? And until this be shewn, we may venture to give credit to our author ; especially as our Sa- viour and his apostles so expressly recognize the real verity of the narration in question; see Matt. 19: 5, 6. Mark 10: 5 9. 1 Cor. 6: 16. Eph. 5: 31. 1 Cor. II: 8, 9. 1 Tim. 2: 13. The question, ' whether one of the ribs of men is now found lacking,' (which has been scoffingly asked, in order to refute the narration above), is hardly entitled to a serious answer. Does a man now, who breaks or loses a rib, beget children who are lacking as to one of theirs ? If not, why should Adam's male descendants par- take of a mere physical peculiarity of their progenitor? The primaeval state of man, without clothing, and without shame, serves to shew, that his Creator had adapted the tempera- ture of the region, in which he placed him, to a condition in which the fewest wants possible would be experienced. The la- bour necessary to procure clothing, was to be dispensed with. Integrity and innocence too are designated by these traits. No guilty passions arose in the breast of the first happy pair. Sin only gives a sense of shame ; and as they had not yet sinned, they found nothing to excite a blush. Even Plato, without the light of revelation, formed in his own mind a picture of the prim- itive state of man, more rational and becoming than some of our modern philosophical critics have pourtrayed. It is thus he de- scribes it ; Ssog i'vf^iev avrovg, avrog iniGiaiwv, xax^ccTifg vvv ctvdQOinoi, ^(ooif oV '&{LOTSQOVf cilXu ye'i/i] q)avXoiiQa aviotv vo-- 134 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XI. ifiovTO. (In Politico). No. XI. Gen. III. 17. The student will observe, that in the sequel, the full train of accents is introduced. This is not done with a design to lead him, as yet, to the study of the accents, in respect to their consecution or train^ i. e. the manner in which they follow one another, or stand mutually related or connected. This can be done better at a future period, and when the means of doing it shall be af- forded to the student.* The particular reason why all the ac- cents are here admitted, is, that the student may now become ac- customed to read with them ; and that he may become acquaint- ed with the manner in which they are all employed, in order to mark tone-syllables; with the various ways in which they affect the quantity of the vowels, and their restoration where they would by the principles of common analogy be dropped ; with the influence they exert over the insertion or omission of Dagh. lene in the Aspirates ; and also with the power which they ex- ert in changing the place of the tone syllable, in a multitude of words. These are sufficient reasons, founded in the grammatical phenomena of the language as it is now presented to us, why the student ought not to be, and must not be, ignorant of the influence exercised by the accents over the forms and tone of words. Besides these, there is another reason which is not destitute of weight. The accents, as conjunctive and disjunctive^ serve, (at least they often do, and in the estimation of most older critics they always do), to shew what words are to be considered as in- timately connected in regard to relation and meaning, and what are to be more or less disjoined ; a help, which in some doubtful cases is very grateful to the critic, and to which the most enlight- * The second edition of my Hebrew Grammar exhibits the consecution of the accents here referred to, both in poetry and prose, in the Appendix. In the tliird edition it was omit- ted, in order to save the room it would occupy ; but particulary, because Prof. Gibb expects to insert it in his Lexicon Formarum. PART III. NOTES ON NO. XI. 135 ened interpreters of the present day do not fail occasionally to resort. With this use of the accents, however, the student need not trouble himself, for the present ; and when he comes to obtain a knowledge of it, it may be done with very little trouble, and without going deeply into the study of the whole consecution of the accents, i. e. of their various relations, positions, and depen- dencies. In the sequel, 1 shall remark on the accents, only when they in some way affect the vowels, the Aspirates, or the tone-syllable, or when, from their position as praepositive or postpositive, they might naturally mislead the beginner, as to the proper place of the tone of any word. For the rest, I take it for granted, that the student will here acquaint himself with the names and forms of the first and second class of disjunctives, (if he has not already done it) ; as this will cost him but a few minutes labour each day, for a small number of days ; and that he will afterwards go on, gradually to make himself acquainted with the whole number, in the like manner. In this way, the time spent on this object will never be distinctly recognized ; and the student will find sufficient profit and satisfaction, to repay him amply for his labour. (1) '^^TStl, the serpent. The effort of Dr. Clarke to prove that OilS here means an ape or monkey^ is not only opposed to the usus loquendi of the Hebrews, but the thing is in itself utterly impro- bable ; for when or where has the apeheen regarded as ' cunning above all the beasts of the field V The serpent^ however, is the known emblem of sagacity, in Egypt,and through the eastern world. But was this a literal serpent, or only a symbolical one ? Did the writer attribute to a mere animal serpent all which the se- quel discloses ; or did he suppose the tempter to be an evil de- mon, whom he represents as in the shape of a serpent? The latter, as I must believe; for (l) This accords with the commonly received traditions and language of the East. E. g. the Zend-Avesta of Zoroaster attributes the first seduction of men to evil, to Ahriman,, 136 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XI, the prince of evil genii, under the shape of a serpent ; Zend-Aves- ta, Vol. I. p. 25. III. 84 seq. edit. Kleuker. The Jewish tradition is, that Sammael, the principal evil demon, first seduced Eve, and led her to sin ; see Eisenmenger, Entdecktes Judenthum, I. p. 822, (2) There is satisfactory evidence, that the New Testament wri- ters believed in the same thing. E.g. Rev. 12: 9, the devil, or Satan, is called, 6 d^ai(wv 6 f^tyag^ 6 oqtg 6 aoyatog o nXavoiv rtjv oiitovfAtvt]v oh]v' and again, in Rev. 20: 2, the same appella- tions are repeated. See also 2 Cor. 11: 3. John 8:44, where the Saviour expressly recognizes the temptation of our first parents to sin, as the work of the devil; so in 1 John 3: 8. See also Wisd. 2: 24, where is the same sentiment. (3) The nature of the case is sufficient to shew that the writer did not intend a mere literal serpent. Did the author really believe, that literal serpents could speak, and form plans for seducing to the commission of moral evil? If not, (and who will venture to charge him with such ig- norance ?) then must we suppose, that, like the writer of the Apocalypse, he has represented the devil under the image or form of a serpent; see Rev. 12: 9. 20: 2; comp. 2 Cor. 11:3. That a part of the representation which follows, seems to be ap- plicable only to a literal serpent, is merely the consequence of the writer's carrying on, through the whole narration, a uniform con- sistency in the mode of representation, which he had adopted at the beginning. See on v. 15 below. On the question. Whether the actual form of a serpent present- ed itself to the ocular vision of Eve ? most persons would perhaps decide readily in favour of the affirmative ; nor would I venture to gainsay the correctness of such a belief, for who can disprove it? Yet it is no more necessary to the essential verity of the narration and transaction in question, to suppose that there was an actual physical form presented to view, than it is in the case of our Saviour's temptation, as related by the Evangelists, to sup- pose that there was a physical appearance of Satan, and audible words (audible with the outward ear), addressed to him. If Jesus was ' tempted in all points as we are,' a physical appearance of PART III. NOTES ON NO. XI. 187 ihe devil can hardly be supposed to have been one of 'the means of temptation. On the supposition that our first parents were tempted by an evil spirit, (and if Christ and his apostles are to be credited, this must have been the case), then we may either suppose that the tempter assumed the actual form of a serpent, and accosted the mind or eye of Eve, by mounting the tree which bore the forbid- den fruit, and eating this fruit, and thus affording probable evi- dence that it might be eaten with impunity, and therefore tempt- ing our first mother to follow his example ; or we may suppose the whole to be a figurative method of describing a real fact, viz. the fact that Eve was templed by an evil spirit, and did lyield to the temptation. Either of these may be adopted, salva Jide et salva ecclesia ; for the Scriptures are full of examples, in which the like principles of exegesis are generally admitted. Of the two methods here proposed, the former is more easy and obvious, at first view; the second is the most consonant with the nature of the tempter. The objection to the first is,that to sup- pose the devil in reality to have assumed the visible form of a serpent, would be attributing a miraculous power to him, (which none possess but God, or those whom God commissions for pur- poses of good) a miraculous power, employed here for the most fatal of all purposes. The second method is relieved of this dif- ficulty. Nor would the boldly figurative costume of the whole, thus construed, be any more objection to the reality of the essen- tial facts in this case, than the acknowledged figurative costume of the 18th Psalm, is an objection to the reality of the facts on which the representation is grounded ; or than the plainly figura- tive manner of describing the Saviour's temptation, which the Evangelists have adopted, is an objection to the reality of his temptation. Is not God every where figuratively spoken of; and yet, is there not reality in the descriptions ? As to the conversation here, between the serpent and the wo- man, it may be viewed like that between the Saviour and the tempter, i. e. as mental, not with audible words addressed to the external ear. Does it need any proof, that the Scriptures are 18 138 PART UK NOTES ON NO. XI. full of the like examples ? So in Greek, qjtjfit signifies both to think and to speak. Of the whole narration it may be said, that if we adopt the second mode of interpretation proposed above, we have only to suppose, (what is so obvious, and so consonant with the best laws of rhetoric), that the writer has gone through his whole piece, in a manner accordant with the beginning of it. All that concerns the serpent is consistently stated, as though it had respect to a visible serpent. The meaning, however, as ia a multitude of the like cases, is tropical. n^fi , became^ as Storr and others render it. But I prefer the common version. t^"^^ ^ cunning, sly, insidiovs^ Part. adj. Dec. 111.-^373 , 454. 1. a. ""3 >\i^ , lit. even that, or verily that, i. e. ' is it so that ? is it truly so that?' etc. The sign of the interrogative, n , is omitted here, as often elsewhere, 557. nQJJ , the genuine sense of the Praeterite, has said, 503. a. b^'n , of every, i. e. ' is any one tree prohibited?' ys? , collective, of the trees. (3) 7i;n , sing, here, of the tree. ^in3 , Methegh, 87. /. e ; const, form of "]^n, Dec. VI. ^biw^n, Methegh, 87. c ^37^73, see '^27^/D in No. IX. v. 17. ^5>^n, Tav Raphe, 80.-13, Dagh. lene, 79. 3. fB , Dagh. lene, 73. 3, as Athnahh precedes. ]')nttFi, instead of 'jini73n, 65 and 41 ; ] paragogic, 211. a. 1. The tone also is shifted from the penult (100. g) to the ultimate, by the pause-accent and the ending "J^ , 100. /. (5) ^"-yp , 527. a. t]3b3N , Inf with suff. used as a Gerund, see in Par. XXll. 2 masc. plural, for the short vowel (Qamets Hha- teph), see 129. a. inj^s:") , Niph. Praet, made Fut. as to the ense by 1 prefixed, 209 and 503. e. Note 2. Here the words, which indicate ^ future sense, are t:?.:3wN t3i"'2, a time yet to come.-^t3D\:"':;? , suff. dual of D^:>t . an*^:Sii , Praet. as Fut., 209; Methegh, 87. d.^'s;']'^ , plural Part, in const, state, 531 ; Me- thegh, 87. c. Observe, that the tempter does not here say, simply, ' ye shall know good and evil ;' but, 'ye shall, like the Elohim, know good and evil;' a different.meaning I apprehend, from that of the first form of expression. Our first parents, from communing with God, PART III. NOTES ON NO. XII. 139 must have known something of the superior knowledge and hap- piness oHhe Elohim ; and this might naturally become an object of desire. But to ' know good and evil,' in the sense explained in No. IX. V. 17, was of course no allurement to eat the forbidden fruit. Insidious, truly, was the suggestion here, CnVfi^?. , (for fi'^nV^lD, 119. c. 1.) (6) Nnrji , Vav conversive ; N'ln, apoc. Fut. Kal of r;i^1, 244. a; for Methegh, 87. c ti72^;y, Dec. VIII., plur. of dS'^3? , Hholem goes into Qibbuts when the syllable is shortened, 129. c. b ; the Yodh in the ultimate is omitted in the writing, 65. tin , they were^ 469. nby , const, state of nb^ , Dec. IX. ri'i:ih 1 Dec. X. ; for omission of the two Vavs (nTni:^tl)i see 65. The sentiment plainly is, that after they had eaten the forbid- den fruit, they were filled with a sense of shame. It is not im- probable, so far as can be gathered from the narration here, that they had been stimulated by the fruit to excessive sensual grati- fication ; the consequence of which was, the sense of shame here attributed to them. No. XII. Geh. III. 819. (8) bnp , either voice^ or noise viz. of approach, which they heard either with the outward ear, (and this is certainly a possi- ble case) ; or with the inward one, which seems as probable, and perhaps more so. The reality of the divine summons and sen- tence, does not depend on the particular manner in which God manifested himself, or communicated them. "jVnn^O, sing, num- ber, agreeing with Jiin';' , or, if it be preferred, with d'^npN , 437. 2. ']32,for "i^Jna, 152. a. Note. t!^"^b , during the breeze or 140 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XII. zvind, I. e. tovvarJs evening, when (he wind rises in Ihe warm ori- ental countries. Di^n , prob. of the same day in which they had transgressed. i^zhn ^2 , 187. c. 1 ; also 493.6. Meaning; 'They withdrew from the expected approach of Jehovah ;' or, 'they endeavoured, through fear, to secrete themselves, because they were conscious of guilt' (9) JiS^.fi^ , compound of { , which shortened becomes "^^f , (like Tseri final in nouns of Dec. V.) ; ^3_ is a verbal suffix with epenthetic ] (see under 309. d); < is varied like Dec. VHII"; and for adverbs with verbal suffixes, see 405 ; the H'D is ^^ with n paragogic, 309. a. 2d pers. sing. masc. (10) -^^J: , Methegh. 87. c Nn^J^J , 1st pers. sing. Fut. Kal, from ^^")^ , 244. b ; for final Qamets, see 277. c. The ultimate retains the tone here, notwithstanding the Vav prefixed, 101. b. Note 2. a. The Vav in this case has a Qamets, because i< re- jects the Dagh. forte, 112; Methegh after ] , 87. e. Qh*^?; , Dec. VIII. "^SDN , 469. J^nn^T ,1 as in M^-^i^l above ; J<^h} , Fut. Niph. with Dagh. forte excluded from h, 111 ; the sense is reflex- ive^ like Natin"; Hithp. in v. 8 above, 182. b. 3, comp. 187. c. 1. (11) 'y'i^T]^ Praet. Hiph. of 1^3, 252 seq. nni< , in pause, 144. 1^", Jri is the interrogative, like the Latin ne? 'Tj'^n''^::^ , Piel. of nnij, with suffix, 286. 1. ''nbnb , adv. here, compound- ed of nba , nothings nothingness, b prep., and *^ paragogic. b^N , Si'^khol, short O, 89, Inf of b^N. Lit. respecting the nothing of the eating of it, i. e. Tes\^eciing ihe not eating of it, the omitting to eat of it. b5i< is the Gen. after "^nblab , which is constructed as a noun here, 520. J^b^N, in pause, 144. (12) nnnD, for t;i:n:, 254. c. Note. The ^7 is paragogic, 211. a. 2. '^722? , prep. 'ITsr i. q. S2> , but it is employed only with the suffix "_.!:: , hi, 165. /; it is emphatic here, 467. '^b""!^3n: , 75. b^Ni ^ ^ see on v. 10 ; b^N for b:?.w^w\ , 241. a. 1. (13) ni^Nb, for n'^\\rTb, 152. a. Note. ni^T-n73 , 75. n^'^;:?, sec. pers. fem. ^:N'^r7 , Hiph. of lN\1?: , with suff. "^3-.. (14) t^nbNi., followed by Pesiq, 93. No. 20. ^^*-)iJ, Part, passive. b373 , 72 comparative. '^^^^ , suflf. state of ]iha , Bee. III. '^^.n , 244. a. ""73: , const of d">a; T'i'i.tl -> sff. state of D'^^.tr. PART 111. NOTES ON NO. XH. 14i (15) nn'^fij, for n^?.wN{, 118; followed by Pesiq. 93. No. 20. iT^UJt^ , Fut Kal. of n'^ui , 274. 2 '^D^^^ , Fut. Kal of 51^:3 , the Qamets under "' being dropped, 133 ; lit. bruise^ crush thee^ "^iiin as to the head, Ace. of manner, 428. y! ^32?il5ri, strike, smite, Tav Daghesh'd, 79. 3 ; with epenth. suffix, 309. d ; Qamets dropped under Tav, 133. aj?.:? , as to the heel, 428./. Dec. V. ' But how can the tempter here be imagined to be an evil spirit? What is going upon his 6e% .^ Who are hissecrf.^ And how is the seed of the woman to bruise his head ? Or he to strike the heel of her seed V Questions which have been repeatedly ask- ed, with a seeming assurance that no satisfactory answer can be given, by those who believe thaMhe writer means, in this narra- tion, to describe the machinations of an evil spirit. To these questions, we may answer, (l) That the figurative language respecting the serpent, is merely carried through in con- sistency with itself; (and this is in accordance with the demands made by the common rules of rhetoric, in respect to metaphori- cal language). (2) The seed (yf the serpent, or the children of the devil, was a common expression among the Jews, to designate those who were like him in the temper of their minds; .John 8: 44. 1 John 3: 8, 10. Matt. 13: 38. Acts 13: 10. In this case, the enmity between those who resemble the tempter in character, and those who are of an opposite disposition, appears to be desig- nated. But (3) If by the seed of the woman be here meant, ' Him who was born of a woman, and made under the law' (Gal. 4: 4), then does the whole passage acquire an emphatic meaning, which it is easy to understand. This is, ' That there should be enmity between the prince of darkness with all who resemble him, and the Messiah ; and perhaps, also, that the latter should oppose and crush the former, while all which the former could achieve, would amount only to what may be compared with the crushing of a serpent's head on one part, and receiving a wound from it in the heel, on the other. But as the New Testament writers have no where expressly given this interpretation to the passage in question, and we are not directly authorized to make such an 14^ PART III. NOTES ON NO. XII. interpretation of it ; I must, on the whole, acquiesce in the gener- al idea, here designated by the particular imagery that is em- ployed. I would deduce from the whole, the sentiment, that the serpent or evil spirit, instead of gaining a complete victory over our first parents, (as he designed to do), should experience disap- pointment, and be himself crushed as it were with mortal wounds, (see Rom. 16: 20) ; while he should inflict only less deadly or fa- tal ones, on those whom he maligns. The manner in which this was to be accomplished, does not seem to be definitely pointed out by the words in question. As to the expressions, going upon his belly^ and eating dust^ what are these but a tropical manner of designating the humilia- tion of the tempter? A humiliaiion yet to be more generally and completely manifested, than it ever has hitherto been. !-l3^rt,Inf abs. sui generis^ 287. 2. 514. a. ^:ini:5? , with fern, sufif., Dec. III. e, and 352. 1. ";:nri, Dec. I., as the Tseri is impure ; for the idiom, see 569. "^^brj, 244. a. y^^i^,-, with fem. suff., UJ'^J< , vir^ man, husband. ^npVdJri , rendered by the Lex- icons, desire^ sexual passion or affection ; but how does this agree with the sequel? The Sept. (Alexandrine) renders it dvudTQoq^ri^ conversion viz. attitude of obedience, comp. Ps. 123: 2; and Aben Ezra explains it by Tjm;7ri;73 , thy obedience ; which accords well with the context, and may be easily derived from pTiJ , to run about after any things which is characteristic of a state of subjec- tion. As to the meaning, sexual desire^ how is this possible in Gen. 4: 7, where is it said of Abel, (or of sin), that ' his (its) denre^ inpViTi , should be unto Cain V b'^TS") , 89. (17) r^'^'^ , tone on the penult, but accent (Zarqa) on the ul- timate, because it is postpositive, 93. No. 13; also 95. a. "^PUiN , with tone on the penult, which changes the Sheva that would re- gularly be under the n (see in Dec. XIH. c) into a Seghol, 148. fl, (without a penult tone the word would be read, "^riU^i^) ; but the accent, Segholta, is on the ultimate, because it is postpositive, 93. No. 8. The student may see for himself, in the frequent in- stances of this nature, how uncertain a guide the accents would be, PART III. NOTES ON NO. XII. 143 in finding the real tone of many words ; comp. 95. ':]''f)'"l i "n-rN , [in regard to] which, 428 3, / gave thee commandment Of the two accents (it is the satne accent repeated) here, on the verb, the former marks the penult tone, 95. 6. "iwi^:?, 119. c. 1. =1373^ , see in No. XI. v. 3. nn^ntl , fem. of n=inN , 323, in Par. No. III. ':]S.^i5!'a , compound of a prep., n^l^? prop, a noun, but used as a prep., 407. a ; '^-^ suff. with pause accent (Zaqeph Ga- dhol, 93. No. 7) on the penult, which turns the regular Sheva into Seghol, 148. a. ns^rDi^n, Fut. Kal 2 pers.sing., with rt3_ epenth. Suffix, 309. d. The composite Sheva (instead of Sheva simple) under the Kaph, is not a very usual thing; still it is nothing very uncommon, 51. "'D^ , plur. const, of a''?3;^. '^''j^.ri, Milel^ 100. y, remark in small type. (18) yip , the thorn^ generic here. li*!";:, Dec. I., the thistle^ lit. a luxuriant weed^ from TI't; , to grow luxuriantly ; generic here, like V^p. ^5 in pause, for Trb out of pause, 408. col. b ; ^b is the Dat. here ' of the person or thing for which any thing is, or is done, etc' ^^5^1 ? with tone on the ultimate, because of the Vav prefixed, 101. a. JTl-rn "y^Z -, the herb ofthejleld, i. e. fruits and vegetables. No mention is here made of flesh ; and from this, most critics have supposed that the writer means to intimate, that the eating of flesh was not yet allowed to man. (19) n^'T , from rf^T , Dec. X., because the Tseri penult is im- mutable. In Talmudic Hebrew, it is written Ji:^'t , which shews the true form of the word; whose root is 5>1T. '^'^'s^l, 95. b. b!?*iJ5 , with penult tone, because the word precedes a tone-sylla- ble, 101. d TjllUJ, Inf with suff. 521. 1127373, see in No. XI. V. 3. nnjpb in pause, Pual Praeter. ITUJPi, Fut. of verb nry. The curse here pronounced on man, involves the idea, that henceforth the earth was to become much less fruitful than be- fore, and also that it was to produce such shrubs and weeds, as would much retard his labour for sustenance, and render it more painful and difficult. ' The sweat of his brow,' by which his Ibread was to be procured, indicates strenuous labour and exertion. So far as all these things were painful, and occasioned incon- 144 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XIII. venience and disappointment, I consider them as much a part of the penalty, (lin^P) ni)2, Gen. 2: 17), as ' the returning to dust,' which is mentioned in the last part of v. 14. Why these should so often be separated from each other, as they have been by many critics and divines, it is difficult to see. They stand con- nected so obviously, that I cannot persuade myself, that they do not make one totality. If so, then ni72 or riV2 does not mean merely the dissolution of our physical bodies, but every kind of pain, sorrow, and inconvenience. That such may be the mean- ing of the word here, the common usage of the Old and New Testament clearly shews. No. XIII. Gen. VI. 58. (o) i<"n!;T , see in No. II. v. 4. Ma*! , fern, of nn . n^^ , fem. Dec. X., first Qamets immutable, because it is a Daghesh'd long vowel, the root being i'ifn , masc. noun, y^ , fem. n:^n instead of Jl-:^-^, 32. and 58. fnJ^ln , for V"5Nn3, 152. a. Note. ^s'-^, with double accent, 95. b. ni'lihio, const, plur. of n^'^n:'3, Dec. XI. isb, from ib . S^-n pn , only evil; 5>n may be taken as a noun here, or as an adj. agreeing with 1i?;."l, the sense being the same in either case. fii'^rT'"b:D, lit. every day ; but the Hebrews expressed the idea o^ semper, per ornne vitae tempus, olrjp xt\v tJ- fugav, by the use of this phrase. In English we may say, con- tinually, without intermission, always. (6) t3h i"^} , Niph. Fut., with accent retracted and final Tseri shortened, 101. 6, and 129. a. Ht;3>, Pluperf 503. 6. V"5N3 , as in v. 5. :22f:?n'T , Hith. Fut., the tone is not retracted here, be- cause the penult syllable is not simple, 101. b in e. g. God is here spoken of in a manner altogether a/i9(?a>7ro;xo:i^w^. But this is nothing strange ; for the same thing may be said of very ma- ny expressions, in all parts of the Old Testament and of the New. (7) nhai^. , Fut. Kal. 1 pers. sing, of nh72 ; J2i< not N , be- cause of the Guttural iX, comp. in 138. "'nNn'a , 95. 6. b5?a, 407. /. fi'lNr) , i. e. DnN )'n , 406, from man, viz. ' beginning from man or with man, 1 will destroy rJ7Jn:n-ny , unto beast, unto reptile,"' etc, i. e. destruction shall extend from man unto beast, PART III. NOTES ON NO. XIV. 145 etc. Q";72iaJi, in pause. ''riX3h3 , Piel, with Dagh. Hhireq under the a, 232. 6. dn''ip3>, with Yodh omitted after the n, 211. 6, and 63. No. XIV. Gen. VI. 1322. (13) yp. , Dec. VII., const, state. ''DB':: , suff. of C1'^:d , used as a prep. here. Meaning : ' I have determined that all flesh shall come to an end, be destroyed.' Vl^jn and O'Dti both in the Ace. governed by Hijlt^ , 511, also 609. in e.g. tiri'^rE^ , by them, the original sense of ""m being lost, and the compound word be- coming a mere preposition. "^^^rj, with Dagh. forte omitted in the first :, 73. Note 3, from nsri ; it takes a verbal suffix, 410. Note, comp. 313. Cn'^hu;?3 , Part. Hiph. with suff. ti_ , used as a Fut. in -rw*, 529. DN, on or in ; so this prep, clearly means in 1 K. 9: 25. Ps. 67: 2 (comp. Ps. 31: 17), 1 Sam. 7: 16. ' On or in a place, where something is done or happens,' is a sense which Gesenius assigns to it in his Lexicon. If, however, yii.ij be tak- en here for -what it contains, viz. animals, vegetation, etc., then there will be no need of this peculiar sense of nN , but n'^Siui^a may be understood before it, and we may translate, / will destroy them, [and I will destroy] the earth. So the Seventy, Onkelos, Aben Ezra, and others; but the Syriac Version has (.i^M vili., 07i the earth. (14) n^?;, Imp. Kal. nnn, const, of Dec. X., with penult vowel immutable, as it involves an implied Quiescent; which ap- pears in the Chaldee form, fi2^V*P ? Dec. I. from ''U;"'b"4; , but not, like the others, doubling Its last letter in the plural; comp. 325. e.g. 2. Ty^^r\, n-. suff. 309. c; see also 313. (17) "^r^T , ^ \62. c. 1 ; for the expression of the pronoun here, see 527. a. ''^^n , see on v. 13 above. i<"'^!'3, Hiph. Part, in Par. XX. r)lri-i;b , Inf Piel, 522. i^-'i-^Jl , in which, 478. a. j^iji") , in pause, with regular medial 1; see in 271. b. PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XIV. XV. 147 (18) ""ntapn}, for "^nvrprr, see 65; Fut. sense, 209, being connected to preceding verbs or participles with a Fut. sense. rjn, in pause, 408. riN Ace. nfe^ai, Par. XX., Fut. sense, 209. (19) '^'nrt^ n article, having Qannets here before n , contrary to the usual custom, see 152. a. 3. N'^^n, cause to go in, intro- duce. ri'^hnb , for n^"'nnb , 63, Inf Hiph. of rt^ll , Mi. for the pre- serving of life. 1''n% Methegh, 87. d. (20) Sl'ii'n??., tJ prep.; n art. 152. a. 2. -=1 n:'^?3b , IH- suflf. 336. b. "Tj'^V.fiX ? prep, bfi? in the form of a noun plural, 407. 6, i. e. with a suffix attached to it, such as nouns plural receive, viz. *?)%.'. ni^nnb , see in v. 19, written plene here. (21) nj?. Imp. of n;^b . bls^;;, Methegh, 87. e ; lit. which should he eaten., 504. i. inCCNT , Fut. sense, 209. niTT] , the same. tjnb , 408. b . nbSwNb , Dat. after rt^n to become, which is the usual construction. (22) fy^T , apoc. Fut. Kal, 283. y. Irrt)!^ "jS , so did he, a repe- tition of the preceding assertion, which increases the intensity of it, (comp. 438. d) ; it being as much as to say, ' Noah did exactly according to all which God had commanded him.' No. XV. Gen. VII. 724. (7) ^2S72 ., from., from before, compounded of t3^3D and 1^ . (8) "J^ , of out of a partitive prep, signifying a part or portion of nnTnt3n,art. 414. 1. n53\N{, I";?? with verbal suff. n2_ , which suff., with the preceding Ty^ 478, makes the relative which., while ]'^N makes the negative verb, is not. n^'iNn, with Soph Pasuq after it, 93. No. 1 ; wrongly here, as the sentence plainly is not completed ; comp. 96. (10) n?n^Jb , const, state of n:^n*ij , 457. a ; lit. after a heptade of days. "^72^^ , t) that ; "^r) , const, of Q*;^ . (11) nik\75 U3^ ri:UJ2, lit. in the year of six hundred^ 461; n:U5 , const, of 513 ID , Dec. XL Sir^D , i. e. ti:\D3 , 559. '^t'hi^ , b as sign of the Gen., 421. 6 ; i. e. the years which had respect to the life of Noah, which were computed by Noah's age, comp. 421. Note. u;*in2 , for uiinna . ''3'ii''n, i.e. in November; for be- fore the Israelites left Egypt, they began their year with October, 148 PART HI. NOTES ON NO. XVII. called Tisri. -\Tijy-n5-np3 , see in Par. XXVIIl., B. No. 17; al- so see 458. ui'inb , for ^inrib ; used as a Gen. here, see on '^I'nb: in V. 11. above. rrT.n fii'S , on the very same day, t3i*2 for di-^na . niD-^y:^ , const, fem. form, plur. of -^1^73 , Dec. II. The plur. is as those of Dec. XI. ; see 327. 2. HanN , plur. of Dec. X. ^innc:, 146. (12) CVa-iN, 459. (13) CISS? , self-same^ lit. bone^ substance^ body ; applied to things, not to persons, 475. 2. d. nxVlJ , const, state, 457. a. (14) >i:3-!:S, lit. of every wing^ or, every winged creature^'m A]^ position with *iiE: . nsnn-^N , into the ark. (15) \:y^ tyyd , 438. 6. 12 t^;^ , 478. a. (16) "ll?.?, '1?S prep., behind, after, 506. (17) 1inipyi n^i"v2J2, 460. (16) {<:, Imp. of !S<:2^, 244. (17) JlSys for P)i:s?il3 ; and so of the nouns that follow. tJlohn, tl as a pronoun, 412. Note 1 fi^^in, Imp. Hiph. of n:^ ,247. ^. 2. The reference (*) is to a Masoretic reading at the bottom of the page, viz. M^Tl, i.e. S^it'^n , instead of the usual N^.TH . litn^") , made Fut. by 1 after an Imperative, 209, and then this Fut. has the sense of an Imperative, 201. Note ; so also, ^"iC=i , ^^^n, which follow. (19) t]n"^nns-3ab. , suflf. plur. of rTns'i3tt , Dec. XI. g. (20) 'jn'^2 ? apoc. Fut. of n:3 , 283. /. riST73 , Dec. VII. f?. b^ll, 283. y. g. ribi' (n'lVis? 65) plur. of Ji'-iy. hsT?^.?? for That the whole narration respecting the deluge has been re- garded, and is still considered, by many critics, as a story which is partly fiv&og and partly fact, need scarcely be said, after the details which have been exhibited above, respecting opinions re- lative to the creation of the world, and the original condition of man. That a partial inundation, probably an extensive one, over some one of the widely extended plains of the East, very ancient- ly took place, is generally conceded. The extent which our au- thor assigns to it, is regarded as a fictitious supplement to the story made by tradition, or as resulting from the mistaken views of the writer himself. That difficulties can be easily suggested, relative to an occurrence of this nature, no one will deny ; but that the event was impossible, or even improbable, (considering the evidence of it afforded hy the present condition of our globe), cannot in any way be made out. PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVII. 153 As to all the questions which can he raised, relative to the form of the ark, the possibility of immuring in it all the various kinds of animals which water would destroy, and of supporting them there for so long a time ; it is plain that they must be mat- ters of speculation merely. In regard to the beasts going into the ark, it is evident, that the whole occurrence is regarded by our author as a miraculous one ; and admitting the truth of this, there is an adequate reason or cause for all the occurrences which took place. The vast quantities of relics, belonging to animals of the tropical regions, which are now found in high northern la- titudes, shew that some mighty engine of destruction, like that of the deluge, must have sometime been in operation ; and the remov- al to so great a distance, of animals that are indigenous to the south- ern climate, shews that the agent must have been a water-flood. We may, therefore, believe the account of Moses; at least we may do it, until something more probable, and better authenticat- ed, shall be substituted for it. And this is not an event which is likely to happen. No. XVIT. Gen. XI. 19. (1) InB^, lit. lip^ but here signifying langvage ; as in Is. 19: 18. 33: 19. Zeph. 3: 9. Ps. 81: 6. nnN , (instead of nm); the pause accent changes the Pattahh under n into Qamets, 144, and then this occasions the preceding Pattahh to become Seghol, 142. ft. Q'^ntTN, plur. of nhfi< (ihn), and used as plur. merely for the sake of agreement with a plur. noun which it qualifies. The sentiment here plainly is, that all the earth (or all the land) spoke one and the same language. The repetition of the idea, by adding C^^tlN tl'^nn^, is designed to express as much as to say, ' exactly the same language,' 438. d, and Note. Vitringa and others construe DHiN Ji5^i5, as meaning ' unity of purpose or design ;' but Perizonius, in his Origines Babylonicae^ Cap. IX., has sufficiently refuted all such interpretations. (2) t!yD:a , Inf of 2>p:, with suff. 0-, see in Par. XXII.; when they removed, 521. . D'lJ^^^ , either eastward, OT from the cast. The word may mean either ; and there is nothing in the 20 154 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVII. context, which will certainly determine. Ararat in Armenia, where the ark lodged, lies north of the country of Babylon ; but as the originni settlers of the eastern countries were wandering shepherds (Nomades), it is impossible to say which way the great body of them had travelled, before they came to the plains of Shinar. ^^^'pS , Dec. Xll., properly a valley^ intervale; but al- so, a low plain^ as in Syriac and Arabic. 1 ^V^.^.} , with accent on the penult, \Q\. d^ from 3'lj^ . (3) ^ns;'n~b?< C^i^ , lit. man to his companions^ i. e. each to the other, or, to one another; Inin., plur. suff. of yn , for Tn'^yn , 336. Note 4. 1. The Tseri of the ground-form is immutable. in^rj , Imp. parag. of nn^ , with accent (Yethibh) on the penult, but tone on the ultimate, 100. A, the accent being praepositive. The Imp. without parag. Ti^ is in. It is used as a kind of inter- jection here, like age^ agedum. tl23b3 , 1 pers. plur. Fut. Kal of inb , with !i_. paragogic, 205. S'^r^b , fem. gender, with a fem. singular, Tiz^b , 322. The two words together must be rendered, Let us make brick ; a literal translation in Latin would be, Lateri" ficemus latcres. "Dntii , Fut. parag. as above. ncn^b , Dec. X., the Tseri being impure, lit. to a brand, or with a burning, i. e. ' Let us burn them thoroughly.' "j^Nb , the asterisk refers to a note at the bottom, n y^p , i. e. Qamets with Zaqeph, marking the effect of this accent in prolonging the Seghol in the word "jn^, 144, comp. 149. '>bnn') , where the first accent, Munahh, stands in the place of a Methegh, 87. Note 3. The bitumen, which is designated by this word, is common in all the plain of the Euphra- tes, and floats on the surface of standing water, in small ponds, marshes, etc. It makes a mortar, which in time becomes harder than the brick itself, and seems to be imperishable. ^"^r^ , for (4) r::"i: , 1 plur. Fut. Kal i:V , Dagh. in Lamedh, 75. a D^t: ^^ , Beth Raphe, 80. Meaning : ' Whose top shall be ex- ceedingly elevated.' n:V-n"^y 3, the like forms as in H2':?-rf::33 . yi?: , 1 pers. plur. Fut. Kal of yiD, lest we scatter ourselves, or be scattered^ 181. Note 2. W^i;.!, from ni;, 208 Note 2. n^-jb , 63. 123 , with PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVII. l/>i> tone on the ultimate as a verb; but i:^ would be a prep, and a pronoun, signifying with us. In such cases, the accents not unfre- quently answer a good purpose. (6) D>Db , bb with suff. Q-. . D^tin , a^ suflf. pronoun ; b^n , Inf. Hiph. of bbh; regularly it would be bnn,butthe final Tseri is shortened on account of the tone being thrown forward upon the suffix, 129. a, while the H retains Pattahh, contrary to analogy, which would make the form to be C':?/Tr!; see 133. a. As to the Daghesh in b , see 258. n^tjyb C'irnn Jin , and this is their com- mencing to operate.) or, the commencing of their operation. iM^ , tl'nl2 ""^^^l , there shall not be cut o^ from them, i. e. one shall not hinder, 500. Note 2. l'J:fi< Vs all which^ Both phrases together mean : ' They will not be restrained as to all which, etc' ?i72T; , from tl^T , 266. (7) n'lns , parag. Fut. 1 pers. plur. of Ti^ . For the use of the plural number^ see on Gen. 1: 26 above. nb33 , the like form from br2 , 266. rC'i;, plainly meaning, language. in3?'7. , see on V. 3. above. (8) yD n , apoc. Fut. Hiph. of y=)S, with retracted tone. ri3:3b , 63. ' (9) ^33, for tone, see 141. Note 2. The word is probably a contraction, from b^bz , confusion^ or to confound. Di'^Dn , Hiph. Praet. of yiD, with suff. fi- ; for the dropping of Tseri under the n, see 133. a. It has been a very general opinion in times past, that the ori- gin of diverse languages among men is to be found in this occur- rence. But facts seem strongly to militate against this, as a prin- cipal cause. From the earliest times, down to the present hour, hither Asia has almost all spoken a language which is radically the same. Wherever Abraham travelled, he understood the lan- guage of the people with whom he met. We may then with great probability suppose, that the confusion here mentioned was but temporary in its effects, continuing only until the purpose for which it was designed had been accomplished, viz. the scattering abroad, so as to people different countries, those who intended to 156 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVII. cluster in one grent city. It was thus, that Providence made pro- vision for the peopling of extensive regions; and the design of counteracting this, appears to have heen the criminality of the men who purposed to huild Bahel. Their pride and nmbition al- so, in endeavouring to acquire fame (dc:), were offensive in the sight of heaven. StiJl, as the punishment in this case is compara- tively light, their sin does not seem to be treated as of a very heinous chvi meter. That the diversity of languages, among the whole race of man, can not be charged upon the building of Bahel as its direct cause, would htrdlyseemto require proof Still, as the occurrences on this occasion, gave rise to the separation of men from each other; and this eventually became the indirect occasion of great diversity in language ; it is not without some reason, that this di- versity is attributed to the building of Babel. The diversity of language, as it now exists, is. one of the most difficult problems for the philosopher or the divine to solve. No satisfactory theory, in all respects developing an adequate and probable cause, has yet, so far as I know, been proposed by any writer, who has spec- ulated on the subject of langUrige. The gift or faculty of speech, may be regarded as natural to man ; as much a part of his nature as intelligence and reason. The power of forming sounds, is, from its very nature, almost boundless in extent and variety. Hence the very different sounds which are adopted as the medium of communication between men. Accident, climate, even the physical power of enunciation, with the passions and affections, all have an influence on the sounds, which are employed as signs of ideas or of feelings. Of course, the modification of these is subject, as experience shews, to perpetual change. Let a colony go out from a savage tribe, and remain entirely separate tbr several centuries, and the lan- guage of each will be scarcely intelligible to the other. Still, even examples like these do not account for such radical differ- ences as exist, for example, between the Chinese and the Shemi- tish languages ; or between the latter and the Scythian or Tartar PART III. NOTES ON NO. XVIII. 157 tonafues. A part of this g^reat problem, therefore, still remains without any satisfactory solution. No. XVIII. Gen. XII. 14. (t) Y^, Imp. of "^f^"; , reg. '^b, but before Maqqeph, ^^ , 89. 'Jjb-Y^. 1 '** H^fo^ fhyself^ i. e. go ; for the form of expression, see 545. The idiom is frequent in the Shemitish lanpruages. In a similar manner, we say in English, ' Away with yourself '^':]:nJ5, thy country. '^n^V'^a^ , from thy native place., put elliptically for ^n'lbia V"^:fi< , thy native land. y-)Nn-rfi< , to the land. ^"NnuV , J^_ epenth. suffix, 309. d ; HNnN , Fut. Hiph. of nNn , which loses its final syllable and vowel, when it takes a suffix, 313. (2) "^'Ui^'Nl , Methegh, 87. 6 ; for vowels, 226. "'isb , 507. h. 'i:3nnNi , 129. a.'n\-i-.i!<;y , with parag. rr. , 205. ^^;ij , 148. a. tir.^"? , Imp. in form, Fut. Kal in sense, thou shah be ; for Me- thegh, 87. d ; for the use of the Imp. as Future, 505. b. 2. (3) :]'*D")172, lit. thy blessers., Part. Piel, sufF. plural. ^bbp73, kim who curseth thee.^ i. e. every one, or any one, who curseth thee, the sing, being used generically ; Part. Piel ofbbj?; as to tone and penult vowel, 129. a. ni^N , Fut. Kal of n*iN . 1S-)i3i , Niph. Praet., 209. (4) -2T, Piel, 214. 1. 13 etc., lit. the son of 5 years and of 70 years ; the usual method in which the Hebrew describes the age of any person. Tni<23, Inf fem. of i^^lC^ , with suffix, nw\^ for nN:^ , 1 19. c. 3, also 521. ]n^^. , ^rom Haran, a town in Me- sopotamia. There is a chronological difficulty respecting the departure of Abraham from Haran, to which it may be proper to advert. In Gen. If: 26, it is said that Terah begat Abraham, at the age of 70 ; in Gen. 12: 4, that Abraham left Haran, at the age of 75; which added together make the age of Terah then to be 145. But in Gen. \t: 32, Terah is said to have lived 205 years ; yet Stephen, Acts 7: 4, says, that ' Terah was dead when Abraham left Haran.' As the Hebrew text now stands, this emigration of Abraham happened 60 years before the death of Terah. 158 PART in. NOTES ON NO. XVIII. The Samaritan Codex, however, reads 145, in Gen. T^: 32, which exactly agrees with the account of vStephen, and also of Philo Judaeus, who says, Tflfurrjoavrog Sa avrm tov naigog ixfToe .... fieravloTajat^ \. e. Ahraham left Haran, when his fa- ther was dead ; De Migrat. Abram. p. 463. The difficulty can be solved, only by supposing that the Sa- maritan Codex has preserved the correct reading, (which seems to be confirmed by the authority of Stephen and of Philo), and that there is an error in the Hebrew of Gen. 12: 32; or, that Stephen merely adopts the mode of reckoning, in regard to the departure of Abraham from Haran, which was customary among the Jews of that day. See Kuinoel on Acts 7: 4. The effort of J archi and others to solve the difficulty, by alleging that Gen. 12: 32 refers only to the moral death of Terah, because he was an idolater^ hardly deserves a serious notice. Was he not morally dead^ as an idolater^ long before the departure of Abraham ? In regard to the nature of the promise here made to Abraham^ it is only general. In v. 2, there is an assurance of a numerous offspring, ' I will make of thee a great nation ;' of much prosperi- ty, ' I will bless thee ;' and of great renown among the nations, ' I will make thy name great, and thou shalt be a blessing,' i. e. a subject of praise or of blessing. In v. 3 is an assurance, that the friends of the posterity of Abraham shall be regarded with approbation, and their enemies with dislike, ' I will bless them who bless thee, and curse him who curseth thee.' There is a further and general assurance, that in Abraham, (including of course his descendants), all nations should be blessed. I under- stand this as a prophetic intimation, in very general terms, res- pecting the Messiah, " who was the son of David, the son of Abra- ham." In what respect have the descendants of Abraham been a blessing to all nations, or can they be, unless in the one which this interpg^tation supposes ? Comp. the sentiment of Paul, in Gal. 3: 14 18, Whether Abraham understood the nature or ex- tent of this promise, when it was first made, may be questioned. But it cannot be shewn that he did not ; and perhaps not fully, that he did. Yet the fact, that he left his native country, in consequence o^ I PART III. NOTES ON NO. XIX. 159 this call from heaven, shews that he had a strong expectation of future blessings of some kind or other. No. XIX. Gen. XV. 16. (1) 'nrtfi* , accent Pesiq, preceded by Munahh, 93. No. 20. fi'^ni^n, matters^ affairs^ transactions. "3:^,469. "j^i/a , Dec. VIII. /i, with impure Qamets. ^jb' , in pause 408. b . t^'^'^ti , 403. d. (2) "^SIN , 437. 2. "JPin-n^ , 75. a ; ^niTl, 89. ^D^XT , \ for^ since. ^bin,527. a. p"C73 , a aVial XfyofAivov^ prob. it means possession^ and is derived from the obsolete p w73 = l^^^^^ , to pos- sess. Son of possession means, possessor, 444- d; and here, pos- sessor of my house.^ in other words, my heir. J^^n , is this., 469. pto'l=p'iJtt-5^ , 1 Chron. 18: 5,6; see 107. I.e. The peculiar word p'^a , in the first clause, appears evidently to have been se- lected, in order to make a paronomasia with p^r72'7 in the latter clause. This last word here means, a Damascener.^ one belonging to Damascus. (3) nnna, with n parag., 254. c. Note. 'wUn^'', ,Fut. in -rus^ 629. (4) ^^IJ";^'':, 244. h; for Qamets, 130. a._-^,43^^, he -atho.-^ ^^^Itt, suflf. plur. of n**:???., with Tseri impure. ^^'ZJn"'^, 148. a. (5) rr2rih?l , with art. and rr local. t3?n , Imp. Hiph. of t:33 , 89. nn-j^'OT, with n local, tone on penult, 100. i. b?ir), Hoph. of b?;, 186. Tjy-iT, 148. a. (6) "i^Nni, for Y^,^H> 63. nin*"?, see Part II. No. 10. vJ^i^H!! -i Ji-t. suflf. 309. c. For a commentary on this passage, see Rom. IV. throughout. In the second promise here made to Abraham, only a numerous offspring is included. But was this mere natural offspring ; or were they ' children of faith,' w ho were promised ? See the opinion of Paul on this subject, Rom. 4: 1 1 seq. ; particularly Gal. 3: 7: 9, 1418, 29. Rom. 9: 68. Gal. 4:28, 29. Whether 160 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XIX. XX. Abraham had a clear apprehension of the spiritual meaning of the promise in question, must have depended on his state of know- ledge, and on his state of mind at the time when the promise was made ; and with neither of these are we definitely ac- quainted. That he, however, either in regard to the promise made here, or on some other occasion, was inspired with a cer- tain expectation of a future Messiah, appears from John 8: 56, comp. Luke 10: 24. In regard to '^^j")T , in v. 5, see Gal. 3: 16. i No. XX. Gen. XVII. lB. (1) W^ ti'^rlJPi-]5 , see in No. XVIIl. v. 4, and 459. 5>-4?l| t^Z'2^ , 457 Nn^.T , apoc. Fut. Niph. of ?^i$"^, full form r.i^-^l, 58, and 285. 3; lit. shewed himself^ 182. b. 3. ''TiJ, Almighty; perhaps pluralis majestaticus^ 325. b. 6, and 437 2. "':5b Y-r-'^H'! f in other places nJJ with is used after the verb Y^.H^H > when em- ployed in the same sense as here ; comp. Gen. 5: 22. 1 Sam. 25: 15. Ps. 35: 14. It also has '*";'; tlfi< , in the same sense, Deut. 8: 19. 11:28. 13:4. 1 K. 14: 8. et al. All these mean, 'To live on friendly terms with God ; as it were to converse familiarly with him ; Deum ceu ducem sectari ; to act agreeably to his precepts.' So the sequel explains it; C^^n in^.r**} , esto integer^ be upright^ comp. Gen. 6: 9, D'^T^n denotes freedom from blemish, from any charge of moral corruption or wickedness. For Imp. Iri^n^ , see 87. f/, as to the Methegh ; and for n , see 152. c. 6. (2) n:riN1 , Vav simply conjunction, the Fut. form here retain- ing the Fut. sense ; n:ni< , Fut. 1 pers. of ]n2 , with parag. n- , 205. '?13'nT , in v. 7 above, seems to mean, ' the whole posterity of Abraham.'' That this, however, is the necessary meaning of it, cannot be shewn. Certainly Paul did not consider it so, when he wrote Rom. 9: 6 8. No line of distinction is drawn in the promises to Abraham, be- tween spiritual and temporal blessings. We are left to gather this, from the nature of the case, and from the reasonings of Paul. There is nothing at all incongruous in the supposition, that bles- sings of both kinds were promised. Nay, it is, of course, what one would naturally expect ; and it is what is found in many oth- er parts of the Scriptures. And that Abraham himself apprehen- ded the import of these promises to be spiritual in part, seems plain from the assurance of the Saviour, in John 8: 56. Comp. also, Heb. U: 8 10, 1316. 21 162 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXI. No. XXI. Gen. XXII. 119. (1) 'n':^, Methegh 87. ^. fi-^-il^n , see on No. XIX. v. 1. - C^nV^n , the use of the article in this way, before this noun, is not common, but still it is allowed by the laws of the language, 411. HD: , tried^ put to trial. To tempt^ in the sense of soliciting to 51W, cannot be predicated of God; see James 1: 13, 14. "'^sti, 410. Note. (2) 'r;:2, Dec. VII. irreg., ']3 , const, "ja, suff. -{z .'^)T'^,\ suff. of Dec. III. t;;-^;^ see on No. XVIII. v. 1. n^ijsn, Moriah, the hill at Jerusalem, on which the temple was after- wards built. lnV.3>n-) , Hiph. Imp. of nb^' , with suff., 313. J-jH'^, 63. HmN , const, form, which shews that the true ground-form is nrt.s; = 'IRN , 58, but it is written ^t^^{ by the rule in 142. a. t^lH'l' ^'*^- ^ "'''^^' 241. (i. 1. (3) 2S"i:J:i , 206. Note 1. nj^.i^n, for ^jP.*zr:n, 152. a. 1, and Note. \I?it!;i;i 1 for the first Methegh, see 87. e ; for the second, 87. a. ^'jvn-] , Dagh. omitted, 208 in e.g; final Pattahh 236. "^'^Zi const, plur. of 'fZ, Dec. VII. tj^^] , vdy-yd-qbm^ short O, 270. 3. Fut. apoc. and 208. Note 2. '^:::.2 , 208. ISote 2, n^N , had named to him ; or, had commanded him. The latter sense is the predominant one in the Arabic ; in Hebrew, it is principally limited to the later books, C"'n"i:Nn , the student will note the repetition of the article before the name of God. . (4) iH'^^l'i then lifted up^ } then. iX^^^T , see on Gen. 1: 4. phn?:, 63. (5) =irL" , Imp. of n-i?^ . t:3r , 545. n^b?., 244. a. H^-n^, lit. unto thcre^ i. e. thither^ i/ru/er. ninnu;:'] , Fut. Hith. 1st plur. of r.h-ij , 187. b. 1. nnT:;:i , 205. (6) ti^\1 , apoc. Fut. Kal of Ci^.p , 274. 2.-11:3 , see v. 2 above. nni > in form as a noun of Dec. VI. with suff.;plur., for ^''I'ni , as it is sometimes written ; used adverbially, 403. b ; Yii.the union of them, or they together ; comp. 428. 2. (7)'I"'ZN, Par. XXIV. No. II. --sin, with epenth. suffix, 410. Note. nf , Dec. IX., const. nilJ. PART Til. NOTES ON NO. XXI. 163 (8) Vj)"'!^^;], 75. a ; for Methegh, 87. h. comp. /. DipTaJi, Ace. 428. a. n^aii, in v 4 above. Q'^nb^n , agaia with the article. ]:3^;; , 283. y. d'lJ^i , see in v. 6 above. -b57a72 , 407./. t3"'J:yr , for D-i^i^nb . (10) c:h-:3'r, 522. (11) ^Jjb^ , const, of Dec. II. (12) tjyn-hv , 101. c, and in e.g. ^Tb . 5 suff. dual of ]n|^. . ntin , in the room of, vntg, (14) tip , 87. m. "l2j^^ for T^N ]^^b , propterea^ on this ac- count, therefore, comp. 559. 'n'?,>Jll , it is said, 500. a. Dl'n , now, at present, still. n^fn;; , Fut. Niph. Meaning: ' It is said, even to the present time, In the mount of the Lord shall it be provided.^ That is, when straits and dangers occur, men are wont to say, * In the mount of the Lord it shall be provided ;' i. e. God will take care or provide, as he did with respect to Abraham, in an- cient days, when about to slay his son in the mount of the Lord. (15) n'^r^j, a second time, used adverbially. (16) Dt; , const, form of Part. m^D , from DwNS , 41 and 531 ; Lit. that which is spoken of Jehovah, i.e. declaration of Jehovah, or, Jehovah saith. "^^N "j^^, because that. (17) '^p'^n^t "i^-^n, 514. a n3")^ nanii, ib. neip, lip, shore.'-'d^l'i , 244. 6. Note 1. (18) siD-jannT , 187. c. 3. 'P/i-I , plene, from '^15. Spy , as a prep. 407. a. 'bf?3, 507, a. (19) T^^^T, from m-J:. qtjp";!, 41. -iNa, Dec. VL z.- ^ti-\ , from S'^:'' . Compare with this account of Abraham, what is said of him in respect to the transaction here described, in Rom. 4: 16 22. Heb. 11: 1719. James 2: 2023. It is, indeed, a most signal example of the strength of Abraham's faith ; one which is seldom equalled, I believe, under the Christian dispensation. In respect to the views of Eichhorn and others, who maintain that Abraham 164 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXI. XXII. dreamed of his obligation to offer up his son, and superstitiously proceeded to the performance of this supposed duty ; it is suf- ficient to ask, What is there in the character of Abraham, which will justify taking such a liberty with it, as to maintain that he was not raised above the superstitions of the merest savages ; or who can shew, that he understood nothing of the nature of dreams ? And then, whence the approbation of God, of Christ, and of the holy apostles, bestowed on a horrible act of mere superstition ? For horrible it was, if superstition only dictated it. This is a no- du9^ to solve which, something more than witty conjectures and brilliant declamation is needed. No. XXII. Gen. XXXV. 915. (9) ^'^!J,see on No. XX. v. 1. ^''^y^ again^ a second time; for the first appearance, see Gen. 28: 12 seq. ifin} , procured^ obtained, or caused to be fetched.-^ Sl5^? const, of Dec. I., the Tseri being immutable, an ark, a little boat or hollow vessel t^^'.'^hPlT , with fem. pron. suffix. "T^riS , tor 'i^snna nDTS , 144, Dec. XIII. fern. Diz^nt , 274. 2. IJ^-'n, 152.0.5. (4) ^5r)pT , Fut. Hithp., form sui generis^ for iS^nt^i , the Tseri under the first D stands instead of the mixed syllable npi; the second n assumes the pointing of the Yodh which follows (comp. 1 1 8), and the Yodh then drops out, 1 1 8. Note 3. For Pattahh in the final syllable, see 218. 1 ; lit. stationed herself , plac* ed herself, 187. c. 1. iririk^, from nriN , anomalous, as Dec. III. in regard to the penult vowel. ^^ib , an unusual fem. Inf. form, for n5>'7 tii2Ji>^-:-f^ , 75. a. (5) '^I.^Hi from n^iV yn^jb, 522. Siy'ln, as in v. 3. riDbh, for nilDbin, 63. nn;2^t, a maiden of hers, Bee. X, nhjprii , n- it, viz. the ark, 312. 5. (6) nD2, Part. n^ia. ""ib^^, belonging to the children^ one *fihe children, from *!?.'' . 166 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXIII. (7) ?fbJi7, fem. of Imp. Hiph., from *j^^, which in this case is treated as "^S Class II., 248 seq., cause to go., conduct away. ^^j?.-."''"!!? ^P- ^'^^- ^^^^ the suff. lrT_, the fem. ending of the verb (_.) falling away in order to receive the suffix ; comp. 313. "^b. , Dat. commodi. '^"^l^^IJ, with suff. fem. ^np"';RT , p'^zn comes from p^3 = p:; ; the Qamets under n being dropped on account of the suffix, 133. (10) ^nfijrini , 133. in^ , 507. 6. Ji'^:?:, Moses, if of Hebrew etymology, means extracter., deliverer, which seems to characterize Pharaoh's daughter, rather than the child. The giving of names in this way, was very common in the East. If the word is from the Egyptian Mo water., and Ousche to save., then it means, one saved from the water. The former etymology agrees best with the context ; the latter with the persons who are actors. iTjNni, for she said. inn"""!;^ , i. e. "'n^y73 , 211. b and 63 ; for the drop- ping of Qamets under 73, see 133; for suff. in, 309. a, comp. 307. a: (1 1) vnNj , for vnN , 142. a. from hi< , irreg. plur. tJ'^riwV , with Pattahh impure. Two forms are mixed throughout, in this word ; the one with Qamets pure, as HN, "^rtl, the other a Dagh- eshM form, as fi-^hN , rhfi , (but also "^hN , CD-'hN) . lanbncs, Dec. XII., from n^nD ; for 3, see 506, also 507. a. "^niSTS, 316. c. Note. 1. tlSTa , Part. Hiph. of n'Di , Par. XIX. Hiph. "^-jny , see "^"^.S^W above. VHN^. , 73 (]73), of belonging to., one //. (12) "j2*} , 283. y. "J''fi5. , as a const, state of ^;^l , nothing of none of no. ^^T , apoc. Fut. Hiph. of n^s, see in Par. XIX. !b'in5,forb=)^[ria. (13) t3'^nS3;,*325. e.g. 2. fi"^::: , Part. Niph. of rT2{3 ; for meaning, see 182. 6. 6. ri/sb {Milel) ^ before 'Gutturals, m'p FART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXIII. XXIV. 167 {Milra) is the more usual form ; both have the same meaning. nsn, Fut. Hiph. of nD3 . 'is^l, 148. 6. (14) "T^TTp , Praeter Kal of n"'U5, with suffix. ^L'^^Jb , 507. 6. ^U), prince^ lit. ^br a man^ a prince^ i.e. a princely man, or sim- ply, a prince. \-\;^Tit'n , that thou wilt kill me; n interrog. ; b before the Inf. ; "^^ann , Inf with sufif., 3U6, the verbal suff. here denoting the object of the verb, i.e. the killing of me. By mis- take this form is omitted in the Inf forms of Par. XXII. nni< 1735^ , dost thou say ? In English, the force of the interrog. n falls on these words; in Hebrew it is prefixed to the whole phrase. *^^in , the matter, the affair, viz. of killing the Egyptian. ]^'}73 , a country in Arabia Petraea, lying south-east of Palestine. The student will find it useful to read the account of Moses in Josephus, where he will see what Jewish tradition has handed down concerning him ; or at least, what the fancy of the writer l)imself has added. No. XXIV. Ex. III. 16. (1) ]i^2i:-nN, Ace, 527 and 531 ; }: for ]i Hiph. of bj23. ^n'lzy'D^, from their state of slavery. n^^t:;, Part. pass, fem. of nD3; see in Par. XXI. nb. Q'^D-ripnT, from CiCiJ , and with [great] judgments.^ i. e. distinguished chastisement or evil to be inflicted on the Egyptians. (8) "^I^^Hw^. Tj.N'IJD , lit. / have lifted up my hand, i. e. I have sworn ; av&Qonona^ojg^ for men, when thry swear, lift up the hand toward heaven; comp. Deut. 32: 40. Dan. 12: 7. Rev. 10: 5, 6. nnb, see V. 4 above. n^^^ ""SN , i. e. I will surely per- form my promises, I will shew myself immutable. (10) h11 '^iSjv^ , on account of their impatience of mind^ lit. shortness of mind ; so, in English, ' he is short,' for ' he is impa- tient,' or ' fretted.' (U) n^t^l, for nVr-^i , 116. The Vav here is not a Vav 170 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXV. XXVI. conversive; for then it would be pointed hVi;')2i 208. e. g; lit. And he shall send away^ or, that he may send away. No. XXVI. Ex. XII. 1833. (18) 'J^U^k^'^^n, i. e. -JVCN"]?! "i^in?, in the first month, comp. 551 ; 'i'ln is here implied from the sequel, comp. 562. ^"^.^!a for n'^yn^ . n^^ , 63, Dec. X.--t:"'-jti;y , after it Qi"" is implied, 459 and 551. Note. (19) n^S'iJ , 457. a. ^i<^ , leaven^ with which bread is raised or fermented. i::D\~n3 , bfbhot-te-khem^ irreg. plur. of rT^S , com- ing (as it would seem) from nnz or nb. For the Methegh, see 66. Note. nifTZilTg , Dec. XIII., thai which w leavened, leavened bread. nnn^:-; , 209. nW3, const, of n'^>, Dec. XI. hntN::^ n^is, yn^n , lit. in the stranger, and in the native of the land, i. e. both the stranger and the native. (20) ^b "bs , no, none. lbj;>N*n, 146. (21) 'ID^'!^ , lay hold upon, seize ; for Methegh, 87. h; for ID Raphe, 81. 1. '^np^ , Imp. of hjo^ .nccn , the Paschal lamb. (22) rr^.^i:?, a bundle, bunch. f)&2, in the basin; for this con- troverted word, and for the sense here given, comp. Zech. 12: 2. Jer. 52: 19. 1 K. 7: 50. bN Cm-^rr")^ and ye shall put on, 506. CSTn "i^S , of the blood, some oj" the blood. (23) riJJ-j*] , 209. ^JCS^, ib. "jn^, J^bl, and he will not per- mit. (24) Tjb , Dat. commodi. (26) t3D^, 421. a. (27) N^nn , 469. ^"^N , because. ^2^:5, see Inf. in Par. XXII. *ip.T, Fut. Kal of Tij^, 261. ^nnrrii-^T, Fut. Hithpalel from mn-r or 7(n:5, 292, also 187. 6. 1. (28) ^"I}:^ p, , exactness or sedulousness of action, is denoted by this repetition. (29) rrSil , from lnS2 . ''^"^in , the captive, or the prisoner. 'n^^n r'^^ia, lit. in the house of the pit, or in the place of the pit^ viz. in the deepest part of the dungeon, which was a low cellar or pit. Meaning of the whole: 'From the highest to the lowest, PART HI. NOTES ON NOS. XXVI. XXVII. 171 without distinction.' The sequel shews, that this was extended to the tame animals also. (30) na, Part. Par. XIIT., comp. 202. Note 1. (31) 5li: , Dagh. conj. in Tsadhe, 75. a. The asterisk here points to a note at the bottom, which is, Tsadhe with Daghesh; thus marking the unusual appearance of it after a Shureq, as here; see in 75. e. g. '7^ri'3 , from ^nP) . fi.T . . . . C:^ , both .... and also. apnS'lS , Inf. Piel with suffix, 521. (32) TD1:.3 in pause, ir>bl out of pause, 146. (33) pjiini 1 Fut. Kal 3 fern., agreeing with O'J'iir^ Egypt^ which is fem. and takes a sing, verb, 485 or 487. The name of the country is here used instead of the inhabitants, i. e. a metony- my here occurs, by which the place is put for what is contained in it. No. XXVII. Ex. XX. 117. (1) 13'!'; 1 , spake, but whether audibly to the outward ear, or only to the inward one, is not here said. The noise of the thun- der and of the trumpet, on this occasion, was plainly audible to all with the outward ear; see Ex. 19: 16, 19. 20: 18. But from Heb. 12: 19, it appears that audible words were spoken, i. e. pro- claimed with a sound loud like that of a trumpet. The probabil- ity then is, that the ten commandments were thus audibly and awfully proclaimed, in the hearing of all Israel. (2) C'^'in^. n^a^ , lit. from (he place of servants or slaves, i. e. from a state of slavish bondage. This verse contains a prefatory declaration, setting forth the character and claims of him, who gives the commandments which follow. The commandments pro- perly begin with v. 3. (3) D^")riN: fi'^nVN , which may be rendered, any other God, as a pluralis exceUentiae, 437. 2 ; or it may be rendered in the plural, as designating the many gods of the heathen. The first method of construing it, makes the command most significant ; for then it forbids any other god or gods. '^sE"by , either before me, or be- sides me. The former is followed by the Vulgate, coram me, by 172 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. Kosenm., and others ; the latter by the Sept., nXriv efiov^ and by many critics. The usus loquendi w'lW support either; e. g b? , co- ram^ Ex. 27: 21. Lev. 26: I; r? , nh]t>^ except^ Gen. 31: 60. Ps. 16: 2. Coram me means, (as God was present in the camp of the Israelites), in my sight, in my presence ; i. e. he would suffer no rival god to prefer any chums. The phrase besides mc, needs no explanation ; and (with the Sept.) I prefer this sense. (4) ri31723ri"~b3T rCB, graven image^ nor any likeness^ viz. of God ; for images of other things were not prohibited, as appears plainly from directions respecting the architecture of the tabernacle and temple. T^iN , i. e. n^J< nj^'On , a likeness of any thing which^ etc. (5) ninri'^n, Hithpalel of nh-^. t:^.^^^, to-bbh-dhem^ Hoph. in the same sense as Kal ; which is quite unusual ^Sj: , jealous^ i.e. he will not bear with any rival gods; as v. 3 indicates. Ip/s, visiting means punishing when "Jiy follows. ft'^DS-b? , 506. ~'^.^:':;b , Part. plur. suff. of wNriJ . D"^c>.^ , n'^^^n , i. e. t]''")i'i , generations^ which is understood here. But how does this consist with Ezek. 18: 20. Deut. 24: 16. 2 K. 14:6. 2 Chron. 25: 4. Jer. 31: 29, 30 ; in all which places it is affirmed, that the son shall not die for the iniquity of his father? Onkelos felt the dif- ficulty, and adds, in his version, 'when the children continue to sin after the example of their parents.' In whatever way the difficulty may be met, it is clear that our text agrees with many others in the Scriptures; e.g. Ex. 31: 7. Lev. 26: 39. Num. 14: 18; and also with examples of the execution of such a threatening, e.g. 2 Sam. 12: 14. 1 K. 13: 34. 14: 10, 17. 1 Sam 2: 33. Josh. 7: 24, 25, and a multitude of other cases. I understand the text simply to threaten jei^ere punishment, for the crime in question. In the East, when any man commits an offence against the government with which it is specially displeas- ed, he and all his direct descendants, even to the remotest branch, (and oftentimes all his near relatives), are destroyed together. Such is the common practice, over all western Asia, even to the present day. The meaning of our text then is, that the man, " or THE ' > NIVERSITY PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. ^^^ l^P^^. >?f\^N who makes idol-pfods, shall be punished with a severe punishment, (like that of utter excision in cases of high treason) ; for here is treason against the Majesty of heaven. More than this need not be drawn from the text ; and more than this, 1 do not apprehend it was designed to convey. But in this, there is no contradiction to Ezek. 18: 20, and other texts like it. It is interpreting by the letter^ and not by the spirit and object of the text, which creates all the difficulty in question. (6) *lDn niljy, doing kindness^ performing that which is merci- ful; the Part, f^'^^b here governs the Ace. after it. ^^!5b^|!b , viz. 'n'^'y\'^ ^ to thousands of generations. Meaning: 'Although punish- ment in the case of idolatry will be severe, (like that in cases of treason under the government of kings); yet my mercy shall be exceedingly greater than the measure of my severity. While the one extends, (so to describe it), to the third or fourth generation only, the other, (to describe it in like manner), extends to the thousandth.' "^niiTa , mlts-vd'thdy^ the Vav being moveable here, and its vowel being placed over it, for convenience' sake in the printing ; from n]:73 , where the mobility of the Vav is sufficient- ly manifest. (7) Nt:n Nb, ihou shalt not utter, pronounce^ viz. fcu3-ni< , the name of Jehovah^ etc. Exactly in such a sense, is ^<"^2 used before the Ace, in Ex. 23: 1, and in Ps. 15: 3. r^^ , for Nn^nb , to that which is false; NVi; is of the Seghol. class of nouns, see 363. 4. That it menns falsehood here, seems clear. The usus loquendi in this sense, is above exception; see v. 16 below, where we have "^p.'i^ n?. 1 false witness or testimony^ but which same thing is called J^Vi; ^>, in repeating this command in Deut. 5: 20; in both places the Seventy rightly translate ^lagivgia ijifudt^g. So Ex. 23: 1, Ji*);^ TS;, false witness; see also, Ps. 12: 3. 41: 7. Job 31: 5. Hos. lb: 4. 12: 11. Ps. 24: 4. Is. 1: 13. The usual expres- sipn in Hebrew for in vain^ is D3h , or birr , or p"^-) "^X^ . Instan- ces, however, in which NV^ is used in a sense like this, occur in the later Hebrew writers; e.g. Mai. 3: 14. Jer. 2: 30. 4: 30. 6: 29. But in the case before us, this meaning would not give the best sense ; for it would be, ' Thou shalt not utter the name 174 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. of Jehovah, without some profit,' or, ' for any useless purpose.' By a sufficient metaphrasis, this may, indeed, be made somewhat sig^nificant ; but the evident meaning of the Hebrew seems to be, Thou shah not utter the name of Jehovah^ in respect to a falsehood^ \. e. thou shalt not take a false oath, thou shalt not call God as a witness to that which is not true. So the Seventy ; and so Ro- senm. and Gesenius. Comp. Matt. 5: 33 37. James 5: 12. ^jnr"? i^^i (I'l^Oi '^^^^ '^^^ acquit^ will not regard as innocent^ 183. h. 2. But here is what rhetoricians and grammarians call Xiiotrjg^ i. e. a figure of speech, by which the negative form of an expres- sion is used, where an affirmative meaning is designed to be con- veyed ; for here the meaning is, ' The Lord will punish.' So John 1: 20, ovx t]gvi]GaTO, the same in sense as rofioXoyijae in the other part of the verse; and so, often elsewhere. (8) ^ilDT , Inf. abs. used as Imper. here. The reason of this usage seems to be, that this form, in such cases, was understood to be elliptical, and to imply a finite verb; e.g. in this case the full expression would be, 'in^TPi TiDT, ye shall surely remember^ 517. nr^n, the Sabbath^ i.e. the day of rest, the seventh day, Gen. 2: 2. For the precept and the spirit of it, comp. Deut. 5: 1215. Ex. 31: 1317. 35. 13. Lev. 23: 2, 3. Ex. 23: 12. 34: 21. Lev. 19: 3. Neh. 10: 31. 13: 1522. It has been strongly contended by some, that the Sabbath was first given to the Israelites in the wilderness ; as no mention is made of it in any part of the histories of the patriarchs; as Ne- hemiah (9: 14) seems to say, that the Sabhath was first disclosed to the Jews, and to them only ; and as Moses seems to declare, that the Sabbath was instituted in commemoration of the deliver- ance of the Israelites from their Egyptian bondage, Deut. 6: 15. On the other hand it is alleged, that Ex. 16: 22, 23 plainly implies, that the Sabbath was kept before the legislation at Sinai ; and that the silence of the patriarchal histories respecting the ob- servance of the Sabbath, decides nothing ; since from the fact that a thing is not described, we cannot deduce the conclusion that it did not exist, save only in some very special cases. PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. 175 For a full exhibition of the arguments employed by both par- ties, see Ikenius, Diss, de Instt. etc. Mosaicae Legis.^ XI. ; and also his Diss. Philol. Theol. U. p. 25 seq. On the other side, see Selden, De Jure etc. L. III. c. 16 ; Spencer, De Leg. Heb. etc. L. I. c. 5. 10. In particular, Eichhorn, Urgeschichte. Th. 1. s. 234 seq. edit. Gabler, and Paley's Moral Philosophy, chap, on the Sabbath. For myself, as I find a plain reference to the weekly division of time, in the antediluvian history ; as no limits either in respect to the period of beginning, or in regard to extent, can be assigned to this; as the Sabbath, in Ex. 16: 22, 23, is plainly spoken of as a thing already well known; as the passage, in Neb. 9; 14, does not necessarily mean any more, than that God had published the law of the Sabbath at Sinai, with renewed, awful, and peculiar sanctions; as Deut. 5: 15, does not necessarily mean, that the Sabbath was instituted in commemoration of the deliverance from Egypt, but only declares, that the observance of it was specially enjoined on the Israelites, because they were God's redeemed and chosen people, and that they were to make the Sabbath a day of pe- culiar recognition of their deliverance from bondage ; as true re- ligion cannot exist in the world without some day to be specially devoted to its services, because the nature of man is such, that a religious memento of this kind is altogether necessary for him ; I cannot help believing, that the Sabbath began with the creation of the world, and is to end only with its destruction. Even then, indeed, it is not to end, but to be renewed, and celebrated forever in the courts above, where is the true and blessed ' rest (aa/?/?a- TiGi^og) which remaineth for the people of God.' I do not hold the Sabbath to be binding on Christians, merely because it is enjoined by one of the ten commandments ; but be- cause the necessity of it is found in the very nature of man, and of the relations which he sustains, and of the worship which he owes, to his Creator. And as these are the same in every age of the world, so the obligations resulting from them must be the same, and the law of the Sabbath, under every form of religion, must substantially remain. I 170 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXVII. (18) nno"'b , /or Je/iovaA, i.e. sacred to him, consecrated to him, set apart for his worship. "^^ai, 1 nor^ because it follows t, comp. Matt. 6: 2730. (16) n:i-ri , utter. nj^;^ ^y , in Deut. 5: 17, i^y^ "j? , false ies- timony^ i. e. thou shalt not slander. (17) i^nn, eagerly desire^ covet. '^5?,"^., 148. b ; in this case, however, the Seghol occasioned by the accent, is a variation from the usual principle, as the original comp. Sheva here is Hhateph Qamets; see in v. 16. 13;.7, and *^^'^b at the end of verse, are pointed in the same way, although the accents are different. The old custom of deducing every duty, either toward God or toward man, from these ten commandments, is unsatisfactory and inexpedient. Unsatisfactory^ because one must strain them beyond measure in order to make them comprise every duty, and therefore do violence to the laws of exegesis ; inexpedient^ because if these ten commands embrace all duty, then is the rest of the Pentateuch, which comprises statutes that are a rule of duty, either more or less superfluous, and might well be spared. The argument, that these commands are perpetual because they were engraven in stone, will not weigh much with any one who knows, that all important laws of ancient times were engra- ven on stone or metal, in order that they might be both a public and a lasting monument of what the legislative power required. The perpetuity of obligation, in respect to these commands, is what we ought fully to believe ; but we may believe it, be- cause these commands are founded in the immutable relatione and affections of human nature, which are the same in every age j and not because they were engraven on stone, or given to the Jews at Sinai. Other laws were given there, which we do not profess to obey, and which we are not obliged to obey ; cessanie ratione^ cessat ipsa lex ; and equally true is it, manente ratione., ma" net ipsa lex. We are, and always must be, bound to those laws of piety and morality, which are founded in our very nature, and not on what is local and temporary. It is plain, from the bare inspection of the ten commandments, that they comprised, and were designed to comprise, only the leading and most important maxims of piety and morality. To 23 I 178 PART HI. NOTES ON NOS. XXVII. XXVIII. deduce more from them than this, is to force on them a construc- tion which they will not fairly bear. It may be proper to note here, that in several verses of No. XXVIL, there is a double train of accents, in our common Hebrew Bibles ; so also in Deut. V., where the ten commandments are re- peated. The reason of this appears to be, that when the deca- logue was read in course, (in the annual reading of the Scriptures), it was read as 15 verses, and the accents were adjusted according- ly. But at the feast of Pentecost, when the giving of the law was celebrated, the decalogue was then read as ten portions, and the accents adjusted accordingly. In some of these, there is a con- currence with the first division, and then there is only a single train of accents ; the rest are furnished, in the common editions of our Hebrew Bibles, with a double one. This 1 have not adopt- ed here ; but have separated the train which agrees with the common division of verses, from the other, in order not to embarrass the beginner with such perplexities. It is a difficult task, indeed, to make this separation ; but I trust the present train of accents will be found to be analogous. On the subject of the double ac- centuation here, see Abicht, De Accentibus Heb. c. Vil. No. XXVIII. Ex. XXXIV. 48, 28. (4) nnb, 63 and 41. (5) Tl.!.2 , from Ti^ . i;:^;?. , for l^blns , 142. a, and 152. , viz. the fire, 'i;i< being comm. gender, and here treated as feminine. J1"1T 'vliN, strange fire^ i. e. fire not consecrated, fire not taken from the altar. (2) 'iJN J^iSriT , and there went out Jire^ i. e. lightning ; for this is called thejire of God; see Job I: 16. It is obvious here, that the kind of punishment was adapted to the species of crime which they had committed. (3) fi*:i, apoc. Fut. of tl!in, in Hiphil. 'r^l^, apoc. Fut. Hiph, of nD3 , see Par. XIX int).733 , from Ti^12 , 336. Note 4. fi'^^S!;? , two times, twice, Dual of QS'S , nuJnn , nude apoc. form ofrrnt?, Fut. Kal, 183. y. From Ps. 106: 33, and Deut. 32: 4952, it appears that Mo- ses sinned on this occasion ; but the nature of his offence is not particularly specified in either passage. In the Psalm it is said, that ' he spake unadvisedly with his lips;' in Deut. loc. cit., that ' he did not sanctify the Lord in the midst of the children of Isra- el.' But by Num. 20: 12, it appears that Moses and Aaron them- selves indulged a spirit of unbelief, on this occasion. It was for this, that they were excluded from the promised land. Well may we conclude, that an unbelieving spirit is offensive to God. No. XXXIII. Deut. VI. 49, 13, 17, 18. (5) nhfij , one, in opposition to the polytheism of all the Gen- iile nations. The metaphysical nature of the Godhead is clearly not the particular object of assertion here. "^^ib and 'JJUJC: , a repetition of words nearly synonymous here, for the sake of in- tensity, 438. d, and Note. 'r;'^j<7^ , Dec. VI. y. (6) ^^1.2i, Part. Piel, 313. ^r, in, on, before, for the same 184 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXXIII. XXXIV. sense will be conveyed in either way, i. e. ' constantly remem- ber.' (7) tjr3:m;') , and ye shall inculcate^ Teg. Piel in a verb ry, 262. ^!nn',2J2 , Inf. fem. with suff., from :3-^*; , Dec. XIII. g. ^^n^lrll , id. from ^b^ . 'rjnijnn, Inf suff. from 15'^ . ':]73^pn^ , id. from D'lp, in pause. (8) niMb , for a token, for a remembrancer. r)bt2i:"b, foont- piec.es^foontlets. From this precept, in later times, the Jews de- duced the obligations of weanng phylacteries ; which they great- ly abused to superstitious purposes. (17) l^n^'^t? HT^'^D , 514. a.ni:ZJ2 , mlts-voth, from Tl'l'liz . (18) '^^'^niNb , i. e. 'he bound himself by an oath uttered to thy fathers, that he would give this land to you.' No. XXXIV. Deut. XXXIV. 18. (1) rin^5-?3 , const, plur. of rrn^JJ, Dec. XI. h^'i , a mountain on the east side of the Jordan, probably not far from the north- ern part of the Dead Sea, and the summit (:;^i^) of a ridge, on the northern part of Moab, called Pisgah, ti^CD. '^^1 ., in ap- position with 123 . ''iS"""!:^' , before., in thefoce ofo i. e. on the east. ')riN"^*2, Hiph. Fut. of n&jn, made him, to see., shewed him. ny^^n , the region on the east side of the Jordan, which the two and a half tribes possessed. (2) '^t2D2-!:3 DN*) , i. e. ^V.t223 y^i^ ; for so runs the next clause, D^nDJi y'nfi* . The countries mentioned in this verse, lie on the west side of the Jordan, and reach to the Mediterranean, for a considerable extent from north to south. The distinctive por- tions of tribes, which are here named, shew that the narration now in question was composed, or at least revised, after the di- vision of Palestine among the tribes. ]HnMn ti?ri , the sea behind.^ i. e. the Mediterranean. To a Hebrew, who reckoned with his face toward the rising sun, the east was before.^ the west behind., the south the right.^ and the north the lefo. (3) iasn , the south., here, the south part of Palestine. '^S3n , lit. the circle^ viz. the bow or circle of land made by the windings i PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXXIV. XXXV. 185 of the Jordan. i^n"^ ^^p.'^ > '^* plain^ or rather, intervale of Jer- icho^ the city of palm-trees^ (so called from the great number of these which grew in its neighborhood). "i^'k, a town near the ^southern extremity of the Dead Sea. (4) 1'4P^l., concerning txhich^ 428. 3. '^'^n"'^{-)r7 , for the Seghol under n, and the Hhireq under J(, (instead of the usual '^r)'^i<")n), see 287. 1 ; lit. / have caused thee to see, viz. the lands above men- tioned. Ji7au; , n local, 100. i. (5) "'D""^? , lit. according to the mouth, i. e. according to the word or declaration ; mouth being taken for what it utters. Comp. Deut. 32: 4952. (6) nsjP*;} , and one buried, or he [Jehovah] buried ; for the Nom. is not expressed in this case, and we are left to make it out from the context. The latter seems to me to be the mind of the writer. One would not expect an impersonal verb here. "^31 in a valley, (a Wady, as the Arabians call a ravine, with banks more or less steep, and either narrow, or of some considerable width). b'5'3, before i. e. on the east, or over against i. e. not far from, in view of. nii^s n'^S , the name of a mountain, probably one of the sum- mils of the Pisgah ridge. u:*^^ yn^ nV"] , which seems plainly to indicate, that it was Jehovah who buried Moses, and not any one of the friends of the prophet. How could such an one forget the place of his burial ? (7) in733, Inf. with suffix, 521. a. ^nri^ , fem. of nll3 . nhl: , his vigour, active power. ^Qn*!, from fiP), 261. No. XXXV. Josh. III. 917. (9) ^"Q:^ , gO'shu, a peculiar form of the Imp. of li55, not noted in the Lexicons or Grammar ; draw nigh, approach. rrin hither, (10) Ui-'-^i-' -ijnin , Hiph. Inf. and Fut. of '^L^;, 514. 6; the Inf. is written defective for ^^"n^n, 63; /le will surely dispossess, drive out. (11) V'"?.Nn-^3 1T1N rT'nsn 'jinN, four successive words all in regimen or const, state. (12) DD^', Dat. commodi.--t'^!i< , 458. nhfi^. , 438. h. 24 186 I'ART III. NOTES ON NOS. XXXV. XXXVI. (13) t3T:2, Inf. const., 5^2 > and he sunk down lifeless., faint- ed, Fut. apoc. of :]=iy , with Pattahh under the Gutturals. ri^^l, with final vowel long, 144, also 180. 6. (22) ^DN-^pr, 278. 2; for form, 118. Note 2. '^b.^ Imp. of ^\1 . '^,\-^j5'j , Fut. Hiph. of -Jjn , with epenth. suffix, 309. d. j:,">n^ nr,J5 , 527. a. (23) VVDll , thus did [God] subdue or humble. (24) "^ibtl .... Y".*?)- s ^^"^^ ^> denoting continuance; while Jirp") denotes the kind of action, viz. was heavy or oppressive. in-i-iDn, 521. No. XXXVIII. Judg. XVI. 23 31. (23)1!:&^.D, 226. rrh^'iJbl, and for rejoicing. In:, sing., 437. 2. ' (24) ini^ , Aim, i. e. Sampson. i'^n'n'^ nwNt"] , and him who de-- stroyed. 1-''":rbn, and him who multiplied our slain. PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXXTIIl. (25) lTt2'^3 , the vowels are made to fit the Q,eri at the bot- tom of the page, !2it2lD . D2b 1^C3 , when their heart grew merry^ 52\. h. l:"'-)'^OwNiii , the pointing is adapted to the Qeri at the bottom of the page, Part. pass, of IDN. pn:';i , Piel. Fut., that he might moke sport. (26) nn'^sn, station ne, Imp. parag. Hiph. of n:^ , 251. "rjp^TTT , (with points adapted to the Qeri), Hiph. Fut. with suf- fix, from .l^IT:, Yodh omitted before the last radical, 63; Qamets dropped under n, 133. tirrby .... n djl , on iw/iicA, 478. ]iD2 , Niph. is huilt. ]y'vi')Nn , that I may lean. (27) ]Vw^U5 pn^iJ2, 525. 521. (28) i-^DT , Imp. Par. XXII. d-^n 5n , 412. (?. rrttpsj^l , Niph. Fut, paragogic. \nui^ , on account of the two ; the asterisk refers to a note, which denotes that the n here is Raphe, contra- ry to the usual form of this word. D'^ri'^bB^ , [that I may be avenged] in respect to the Philistines. (29) nsbl^ , stooped down towards, the sense requires, took hold of- (30) '^iJ52 n73!n, let me die, 475. 2. a. a^.2 , Par. XIX., he laid out, he put forth. (31) ^'>ni<, for VhJ$, 142, a. ^N'dJ^.T, Dagh. omitted in the Sin, 73. Note 3 ; Fut. of Nt:: . "{"^nn . . . . pS, between .... and between ; the Hebrews repeated the particle in such a case, while we use it only once, and that before the first noun, e. g. here, be- tween Zorah and Eshtaol. t3^UJ , ruled over, governed, directed. The office of judge in the East, is invariably connected with that of magistracy in other respects. Ail kings are judges; and all judges besides them, are executive officers under them of some kind or other. Hence, in the Scriptures, the word to judge often means, in a figurative sense, to have a predominance among, to have a superiority over, etc. If any one should question the possibility of 3000 people be- ing upon the roof of the temple in question, he may be referred to the accounts of the temples at Thebes in Upper Egypt, which have been given by all recent travellers ; accounts which, while 190 PART Ilf. NOTES ON NO. XXXVIII. they come to us authenticated in such a manner as to admit of no doubt in regard to their verity and correctness, at the same time present things apparently incredible, and contrary to all the phi- losophizing of most speculative and theoretical historians. The ruins of ancient Greece and Rome, so far as vastness and extent are concerned, dwindle into insignificance when compared with the astonishing remains of early architecture at Thebes. What is most confounding of all to that philosophizing, in which histori- ans of a skeptical cast are continually prone to indulge, is, that these mighty ruins are, beyond all doubt, the relics of architec- ture designed and executed in ages, when, as some popular wri- ters admonish us to believe, men were not yet weaned from con- tending with the beasts of the forest for their lairs and for their acorns, nor but very little elevated above them. The ruins at Thebes, present evidences of control over physical, mechanical power; of skill in architecture on a scale of surprising magnitude ; and of art in mixing and laying on colours, that are fresh as if paint- ed but yesterday, after having been laid on for more than 30 cen- turies ; which confound and put to shame all that the arts and sci- ences, and the experience of 3000 years, have since been able to accomplish. So much for the rudeness, and barbarity, and ignor- ance, of the primitive ages. The Philistines, the near neighbors of the Egyptians, and their hearty coadjutors in polytheism, might well have, and doubtless had, lai^e temples as well as they ; large enough to afford room for 3000, and some of them not improbably for many more, to stand upon the roof. As to the strength of Sampson, in tearing away pillars on which such an enormous weight rested ; those who disbelieve any thing which is miraculous, will of course regard the whole as |uJ- '&og ; those who admit the reality of miracles, will doubtless be ready to believe, that there was some supernatural aid afforded him, in the case under consideration. A heavy blow was inflict- ed on polytheism, by the event in question, and on its votaries who were the enemies of God's chosen people. PART III. NOTES ON NO. XXXIX. 191 No. XXXIX. 1 Sam. III. 114. (On^;5^, Part. Piel, 231. f'^js:: , lit. spread abroad^ i.e. common^ usual (2) T?"?! ^"^^ s"*^- o^t:']5''5:; the asterisk refers to another orthography {plene) in the Qeri ; see 336. Note 4 (it should be 5), 1. =i>nn, Hiph. ofVrn. niriD, Piel. Inf. of nns, comp. 232. b, but the form of the Inf. mood is not stated there ; to be dim^ to Jail. (3) n3 , also '1*^3 , 63. t:'->t2 , not yet ; as to the form, 403. h. (5) XT,1 > ^ro V'^"^' 270. a. 3, Fut. apoc.^yip^ , Dagh. omit- ted in the first 3 , 73. Note 3 ; comp. at the end of v. 4. "^^ , 75. a. ^IDU; nv:: , lie down again^ 533. ^3*ij , in pause. (6) ^^^1 (^IDi-^!), Hiph. apoc. Fut. of ^d; , 63 and 208. Note 2. (7) i"n^ tt'^p. , had not yet known. (8) m^ , apoc. Fut. Kal of ]^3 , 274. 2. (9) *7b , Imp. of "7^^ . *\2i , speak^ Imp. Piel. (10) Q?33 QySS , as once and again, as repeatedly before. (11) niiJi-"'^D:J$," 527. and 529. nz-^'lriin, fern. plur. Fut. Hiph. of Vbi: . tiVp*} b^in , Inf abs., although not the usual form as to the latter verb, 514. c; lit. beginning and finishings i.e. thorough- ly executing the whole. (13) n"'b!:|:?3 , Dagh. omitted in the first b , 73. Note 3. filnb , 645. .jinD , Piel. tJ3 , 506. (14) DN , ifs but in an oath (as here) it means not. The rea- son is, that the phrase is elliptical. Fully written out it would run thus. If I do thus and so, may God do this or that to me ! See the formula in full, 2 Sam. 3: 35. 1 Sam. 25: 22. In such cases, the meaning of course is, ' I surely will not do this or that.' '^B^n^ Nb , shall not be expiated^ 187. c. 3. 192 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XL. No. XL. 1 Sam. XVIL 3851. (38) l-^-^^ , suff. plural of Dec. VIII., from 1J2 , raiment^ ap- parel. insi , put^ placed. "{^"^"I'lJ , 51 1. (39) bN'T , Hiph. apoc. Fut! of bfi^^ , 63. n^lr.b , n::!?. Inf of ^b^ . -ri&r Cib "^S , but he had not put them to trial., he had not prov ed them. D'nD'^T , Hiph. Fut. with suffix, from *^^D, reg. form 'T'O^ , here written defective, 63, and the Qamets dropped under the Yodh, 133. (40) 'ibp^ , from r|p.73 , Dec. VII., Dagh. omitted in p, 73. Note 3. Q''23N ''pbt! 1 '^t- smooth ones of stones^ i. e. smooth stones, 423. "'if.bh, const, plur. of p1?tT , 41. Q':ynn, root ' (41) ^-npi i:h, 514. c. (42) inTn-;T , from njz . 1-is^ , const, of fis; , Dec. IX. ; lit. with something beautiful, i. e. with beauty. (43) N3, Part, of wN'iS, 527. n^bp732 , Dagh. omitted in p, 73. Note 3. (44) riDb ('7b), parag. Imp. of '7i^V nim^ID, const, plur. of !i:D^y72 , Dec. XL nc^n , Piel of q-^jn . The asterisk refers to a Masoretic note, which is, that ' Soph Pasnq (Siliuq) is placed on the vowel Pattahh ;' which is rather unusual, inasmuch as it generally prolonjs^s it. (46) T^sn*] , Hiph. of n^: , 63. ''nSqni ("^nii^'Drr:]) , 63. from 110. 1?.?. 1 corpse, collective here, corpses. bij5n3 , lit. stroke. In English we say, blast. ba: , prob. harp. "11^3, prob. lyre. (4) Pin, small-drum. b^U'D , the solemn dance, a measured step accompanying the music, and as it were beating the time for it. 'n'^1172,, on the strings, i. e. stringed instruments. 153?, commonly written i^iy, comp 31. Note 4 ; bag-pipe, bassoon? The trans- lation of it by organ, seems to be incorrect. (5) 5>^r ^b:r^2 , (2>73r in pause), lit. with cymbals of sound, i. e. with sounding cymbals, 440. a n^'lnri, of joyful noise or sound. A slight variation here makes the diflference between this and the preceding oxiyog. (6) n^UJsn , lit. breath, i.e. every creature which breathes, all which has life. bVnn , fem. because of its agreement with No. XLII. Ps. CXXXIV. The title to this Psalm, (and to the others which follow), I have printed in small type, in order to distinguish it from the body of the Psalm. That this has not long ago been done, has been occasioned by following the Masoretic rules of arrangement, 190^ PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLII. by which the title is not only confounded with the Psalm itself, as to the enumeration of the verses, but actually made a regular part of it, even in the train of the accents. As this is surely not ' distinguishing things that differ,' I have ventured to throw the title into a line by itself, to omit the accentuation upon it, and to distinguish it from the body of the Psalm, by the mode of print- ing it. m-?.'?^ '^'^V ) (i" the title), means, either ' pilgrim-song,' i. e. song sung when going up^ ascending^ to Jerusalem, as at the year- ly feasts, etc., (which explanation will fit several of the 15 Psalms with this title) ; or, ' gradation-song, degree-song,' i. e. a song in which one distich gradually advances upon the other, or is built partly upon it, by repeating some of its words or thoughts, (which explanation fits many aiixot^ but not all, of the Psalms bearing the title in question.) Such are the usual explanations. But may not some light be thrown on this word, by referring to the poetry of the Syrians ? One of the eight species which they distinguish, is lA-^^CiO) , gradus, scalae^ of the same signification as rib^^J . The name in Syriac appears to refer to a particular species of metre ; see Oberleitner's Chrestom. Syr. p. 287. But what the metre is, in the psalms entitled nib?;?, (if indeed this title refers to metre), we have not the means of determining. (0 Hi^ , see ! i. e. attend^ hortatory in its sense, in this place. JiDnS , Imp. Piel, bless^ l e. praise, laud. "^nz? here means, those employed in the temple-service^ as the next azixog shews. fi'^n72i?n , n who^ 412. Note 1 ; lit. standings which is the attitude of those who are in waiting or attendance, and alert in perform- ing service. nin^-n^5 , the temple. n'-)b''\:2 , plur. masc. of b^^ , 322 ; by nighty lit. during the nights. Meaning : ' Ye Levites, ministering in the temple, and keeping tl^e night-watches there, praise the Lord !' (2) ^Nt5, Imp. of Ni:3. ^"^Ij^, toward the sanctuary, 428. a, i. e. the most holy place where God dwelt ; for toward this the worshipper always turned, when he offered up his supplications, which is expressed here by ' lifting up the hands.' PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLII XLIV. 199 (3) '^n?*?.^': , 201. Note. '}i'^:273 ^from Zion^ where God dwelt in his sanctuary ; in other words, ' May the God who dwells in Zion bless thee !' nil)3'\ Part in const, state, 531. The dot over the middle tooth of the Shin is part of the Rebhia Geresh, 95. No. 11, which is placed on this word. V"iN1^ tl^^lj , which, in the usual method of speaking, are the same as to ttwj/, i. e. the universe. No. XLIII. Ps. cxvir. (1) t]'^72J , fem. plur. of Jij^wNJ, 322. (2) 112 , he has magnified. D^.NlJ, for nS^.wNt , 107. 2 ; fideli' ty.^ faithfulness., viz. in keeping his promises. n;-=lbbn , plainly a general chorus to the Psalm. The whole psalm is evidently one adapted to be sung at the commencement, or at the close, of worship. No. XLIV. Ps. cxin. (1) t3'23""n^t , the name., a periphrasis for Jehovah himself. Thus, " The name of the God of Jacob defend thee," i. e. the God of Jacob etc.; and so very often throughout the Scriptures. (2) "^n": , 120. 6, and 201. Note. "^-jn?: , Part. Pual. (3) TNia^ , Dec. III. departure, going down. bVn73 , Part. Pual, laudandum. (4) an. Part. Kal of d^i^n. i'^l^'2 ., his splendor^ excellency^ ma- jesty. (5) lnin''3, see Part II. No. 10. ^n'^aiy^rr , Hiph. Part, with Yodh parag., 211. a. 4. ri2i\!;b, in pause. Inf. of l'^;^; lit. in res- pect to his dwelling. Both words together, ' Who maketh high [.the place tipTs] of his habitation,' i. e. dwells in heaven. (6) '^b"^2'2J72n , Part. Hiph.. 21 1. a. 4, who condescends^ who stoops dozvn. C^^^L^S, upon the heavens^ etc. (7) ""^.^i:^, Part. Hiph., 211. a. 4, the final Yodh (which draws down the tone) causing the Tseri under 72 to fall away, 133. t:"^^:; , 504. 6. 200 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLIV. XLY. (8) '1"'^^^"^ ? ^n^- Hiph. with Yodh parag., 211. a. 4. (9) ^in'^iji^ , Part. Hiph. 211. a, 4. ni;^y, Seghol. fem. of hj::^ . The whole phrase, ' Who maketh the harren woman to dwell in the house,' is a euphemism to express the idea of caus- ing fecundity ; which the next arixog clearly shews. To those who are acquainted with the peculiar views of the Orientals on this subject, it will appear nothing strange that this is reckoned as a distinguished blessing. Comp. Gen. 15: 2. 16: 1 seq. 30. 1 seq. Luke 1: 25. No. XLV. Ps. cm. ^1'lb (title), b crwc/om, as the critics say, i.'e. b indicating the author ; a common method of expressing authorship. {\) ^tti2 ^ O rny send! Thus could the Hebrew address him- self; and thus we imitate him in English. In like manner, Pindar addresses himself by qlXov rjrop, cor amicum, '^?')p , suff. plur. of inp. , the meaning is, ' my soul, myself,' or, all my powers and faculties.' C'C: , governed by *l3n3 implied. i^lp S"-?? ? 440. a. \ (2) ')'^b^'25 , Dec. I., his kindnesses^ beneficence. (3) ''Dp?'., snff. fem. sing, of 'j^y , the fem. suff. '^_ taking a parag. Yodh, (a poetic form). "^D^^Trtl^, '^'^^.- i" pause, for ^S^- , 236. c. fem. suff. plural. (4) "^D*; "^^^T , suff. plur. of the same form as the preceding. 'Dnt^yTSn, Part. Piel, Dagh. omitted in 7:, 152. a. 5; "'D- fem. suff. referring to u;2: . np.rt , Ace. 511. t:"'^nn , i6., used only in the plural, and of a peculiar form. (5) n^t:, me/i gooc? of every kind adapted to produce happi- ness. *7?."ii:, from "'n^, Dec. VI., suffix as in 336. 6; a doubtful word, but probably meaning here, senectm^ advanced age^ as the o Chaldee has translated it. The Arabic oc , ^^d^ means seculum: jL^T^nnn, 3 fem sing, in Fut. Hith., with ^P':"^iy3 for its Nom., 495. 6. This noun has the fem. suff. "'DV. in pause, for 'D^_ , 336. in c, and comes from the plur. D'>n.i:s>3 ; lit. % youth is re- PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLT. 201 new ed like that of the eagle. Some translate thus; thou renewest thy youth like the eagle. If this be the intention of the author, one would expect ""^p^nnri, as U;d: is addressed, which is usually feminine. But as "ic: is also masc. occasionally, there can be no valid objection to this mode of interpretation. n'ijjs, viz. as the eagle renews her pinions, and thus puts on the appearance of youth ; the actual renewing of her age is, of course, out of question. The object of comparison is adverted to by the writer, in the same light in which it is commonly viewed and spoken of The meaning after all may be simply, that a vigorous and healthy old age shall be enjoyed, like that of the eagle. (6) ntJ3?, lit. the doer of., const. Part., 53\.nip'']:i , justice. iiin"^, [is] Jehovah., 554, i. e. Jehovah executes justice. tD"'t:D';;7:n, and judgment., equity, (7) 5"'^i" , Fut. as past time, 504. c. 2. (8) firinn , with Daghesh'd Pattahh, 58. *]";).&<. , const, of '7^N , Dec. v., constructed like Participials. tl'^Sfi^ , dual, indignation. Whole phrase ; protracted of indignation., i. e. long suffering, slow to anger. 10ri""nn , abounding as to kindness., 428. 3. (9) n**-!;, Fut. Kal of n""-) .'^112": , Fut. Kal of 'ntt: , with 1 fulcrum., 64. The phrase is here elliptical, P]N being implied af- ter "^iti^ , i. e. he will not always retain his displeasure. (10) ^riX3t;b, with inj7'i'i implied before it, taken from the preceding orlxog. Cri "r^^ , to do them, i. e. to obey them. (20) fjb "^"^iza , ye mighty of strength. 2 ^'tUJb , who hearken to, 523. 6. (21) rn^^u;?: , Fart. Piel. "^ips^ , const, plur. Part., 531. (22) oirr^-nN '^b: ''^^a , ending with the same words which stand at the beginning ; and which probably were sung as a gen- eral chorus. It is difficult to conceive of any thing more delightful than this hymn of gratitude and praise to God, for all his bounty, his com- passion, and his kindness. He who can read it, without entering into the feelings and views of the writer by sympathies kindred with his, may well suspect that all is not right within him, and that his heart is yet estranged from God. No. XLVI. Ps. 100. ri'linb , (title), of praise. This appellation is probably taken from the first ori/og in v. 4. (1) 13>''n?l , Hiph. Imp. of 5?Tn, shout, make a joyful noise. (,3) lis^-sr. Imp. of^-'i;. il. . ]i3n, 3d fem. Fut. of Niphal, from ]13, and agreeing with bnn , which is fem. and has immutable vowels ; the world is made firm. t)i7aP, id. from t2la. (2) tN73 , Wt from then, i. e. from ancient times, of old ; for it is parallel with cbiy^. in the next line. (3) rii^^Ji: , floods, a figurative term, designating an over- whelming multitude of threatening enemies. The repetition in the next line, denotes intensity. (4) nibjv'3 , in comparison with the roaring, 454. The adjec- tive which precedes this comparison, 'n'^lN , follows below. fi"'")''!^ , i. e. with 73 implied, [in comparison with] the mighty waves of the sea, Jehovah in his lofty place is mighty. Meaning : 'God in heaven is mightier than all my strong and numerous en- emies.' After t]"'n"'lN , 13";^ is implied. (5) ':^'^nhi*, thy testimonies, i.e. thy promises, assurances. !l5:^i<2, 226. J-iJN:, Pilel of HN:, 292. ^-i^l:, before which 2)ip-nifi<3 is implied, 562. For Dagh. in p, see 75. a. ^-J&^b t'^m ,for a length of days, i. e. for a long time, for ever. No. XLVIII. Ps. 65. hsrsjsb , (title), to the overseer, i. e. the chief chorister, or lea- der in the music ; to him who has the direction or oversight ; comp. 2 Chron. 2: 2, 18. 34: 12. In n-IJ "\i73t^ , (so also in Ps. 67: 68, 87, and liTaT^^ -|"'*ij in Ps. 48: QQ, 83. 108), one of the words is supposed by Rosenmueller, Gesenius, and others, to be 304 PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLTIII. pleonastic ; as in the phrases !13'^3 ^^^^^ > sapientia intelligentine ; bV^"n? , praeda spolii ; nn^nn npjl , statutum legis ; fi^TS?. 1^:^, servus servornm. But with this explanation I do not feel satisfied. I should much rather helieve that "\''ij has reference either to the kind of poetry of which the psalm is composed, or to the kind of music in which it was to be sung, or to something which was con- cerned with the manner of its recital. (2) n^Tsn "^b , lit. to thee is quiet expectation^ I e. to thee I look in quiettide, confiding in the aid which thou wilt :fford. n^t;^ ,i. q. in^^lT, 41, a noun with the ending n^-. which is equivalent to n"^- ornn-. n^^rrn , i. e. n'lrnri 'jb , from the preceding phrase. "ji'^a, i. e. who dwellest in Zion. "1*1: , viz. the vw made in the day of calamity, and to be paid after deliverance from it. {3) yiyS ^ O thou who hearest. '^^'l^' , from lr, wnfo, 407. b. '^rin^Jlesh^ noun collective here, for mew, and so it takes a verb plural. (4) nils' "^"^ll", iniquities^ the word "'"^l" signifying mar/cr* 0/*, and matters of iniquity means iniquities. The form of expression is pleonastic. "'S??. =1113 , are stronger than I ^ 454. Note. 1:'*:S';"I/D, as to our transgressions^ 415 and 416. b. D";\S5n, thou dost cover them^ i. e. thou dost forgive them. (5) ntisn '"}.9i< , i. e. "^nsn -i'iJN"nJ^. fii*^ , happy they whom thou wilt choose^ or, happy the people whom thou choosest^ q. d. hap- py they who are, like Israel, thy chosen people. For the ellip- sis of "iU;N, see 553.y. i^VI ^T.ic'l^ [whom] thou makest to ap- proach nigh [to thee], that they may dwells etc.; i.e. whom thou admittest to worship in thy temple, where thou dwellest, and who thus enjoy near approach to thee, q. d. are treated as confidential or beloved friends. The forms of expression are elliptical ; out of poetry we might expect, "Sw'^'] t;5")j:5r=i. 'Tj'^n^fn, i.e. the temple. n^nJ:;: , 205. nir:3 , with the happiness^ or, with the en^ joyjnents. '^bD"'n 'n . '^'I'^'li) , plur. with Yodh omitted, 336. Note 4 (5). 1. D'^ii^nn^, with the drops, viz. of rain, ns^.:iI?, Folel of :^172. (12) n*)tij;, thou crownest, i.e. thou adornest. "^rilTC: ^IV ^ lit. the year of thy goodness, i. e. the year in which thy goodness has been displayed, 424. T'V.^^]'?'' etc., and wherever thou go- est, there are exuberant fruits of thy bounty. 206 PART III. NOTES ON NOS. XLVIII. XLIX. (13) niN3 , Dec. XL, from infij: , the pastures of the desert dis- til )t'^^ (implied). V'^ST , and with joy do the hills gird them- selves. (14) a'^^S , from *^3, Dec. II. d; the pastures are clothed with flocks, i. e. greatly abound in them. "na , with grain ; also writ- ten nz . tiyyiln"; , Hithpolel of y=l'-\, they shout ; Fut. as present, 504. 6; and so of 'n'^ip; (Fut. Kal. of ^''UJ), which follows. No. XLIX. Ps. 46. JT^'p "3^^ , of the sons of Korah, i. e. b auctoris. Who these persons were, is not altogether certain. The probability is, that they were the descendants of Korah, who perished in the rebel- lion, Num. 16: 1 seq. It is certain that all his children did not perish with him. Num. 26: 11. It is certain also, that some of their descendants were among those who presided over the tab- ernacle music; see 1 Chron. 6: 22, comp. vs. 31 38, where it appears that Heman was one of these overseers. In 1 Chron. 9: 19, we find Shallum, a descendant of Korah, mentioned as one of the overseers of the tabernacle, and it appears that he belonged to a family called Korahites. These last are mentioned also, in 1 Chron. 26: 1, and 2 Chron. 20: 19, as being among those who were engaged in religious music. Heman (mentioned above) seems to have been quite a distinguished person, in the time of Solomon, 1 K. 4: 31. From all this, it would appear that there were men of eminence among the Korahites, in the time of David and Solomon, and the probability is, therefore, that the Psalms inscribed V^np ^:ab , belong to them as authors. These are Psalms 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 84. 85. 87. 88. In style, they differ very sensibly from the compositions of David ; and they are some of the most exquisite of all the lyric compositions which the book of Psalms contains. The tille was probably affixed by some editor of a Inter age; who knew only the general report that the Psalms in question belonged to the sons of Korah, and could ob- tain nothing certain, as to the individuals who were their respec- tive authors. r)il2]:v^ plur. only; found also in 1 Chron. 15: 20. PART III. NOTES ON NO. XLIX. 207 Gesen., ' a key in music ;' Rosenm., ' a musical instrument.' The former seems more probable; comp. 1 Chr. 15: 20 with v. 21. Does not n'''73bi] mean treble in v. 20, in distinction from rr^z/ttttJ, bass^ in v. 21 ? If ni72b?^ be elliptical, for niT^b?.; bip, the voice of maidens, it may very naturally designate the treble. (2) 12b , Dat. commodi lb"] , our means of strength., i. e. our defender. ni 1252 , from nniS , Dec. I., because the first Qamets is immutable. iint:^. , Dec. XII. Jn* , and know, that I have the sovereign control of all. !:i'-\N , from tim, 181. Note 2.' ^iVd , prob. interlude, viz. with instrumental music ; so the Seventy, StaipccXfia, an instrumental chorus ; perhaps from^{'rO or b^O , to lift up, to elevate, viz. the instruments of music, in this case. ' No. L. Ps. 29. (1) B'^bi* 'SS: , ye sons of the mighty, or, ye sons of the gods, an honorary title of nobles and princes; comp. Ps. 89: 7. Some un- derstand it of angels, in both places. Sept. vtovg x^jmv, the sons of rams, i.e. lambs ; and so all the ancient versions, with Houbi- gant, making t3^^N the plural of b'^fi? ; a most singular example of failure in taste to perceive the beauty and meaning of poetry. =ian etc., ascribe to Jehovah glory and power. (2) 'I'np 1133 , the glory due to his name, i. e. to him, 424. ttJ'i'p n^^'ina , in sacred ornament, with holy splendor, viz. dressed in sacred, splendid attire, becoming those who approach the pres- ence of the Majesty of Heaven ; see 440. a. (3) T:)n'* bip, here means thunder; as the sequel plainly shews. t3';7an b? , above the waters, viz. the waters which are ia the firmament, the waters in the clouds ; comp. Gen. 1: 7. b*5 , PART III. NOTES ON NO. L. 309 "jinsSl , the glorious God^ 440. a. * Jehovah is above the mighty waters^,' expresses his supremacy, or his omnipotent control. (4) ri32 , lit, with strength^ i. e. strong, poweriul, 442. "i^I^S lit. with majesty^ i. e, majestic, 442. (5) C^t-j^? "^^"^ , describes the effects of the lightning, in rend- ing the lofty trees on the mountains of Lebanon. 'pS^A^n , from ]ib to be white^ and so, White-mountain. (6) D'l'*p"}^ , he makeih them to leap^ i. e. the mountains ; refer- ring to the rocking of them under the awful reverberations of the thunder, i^p , poetic form for 2 . "ji"'">'yp;, the Sidonian name of mount Hermon, (see Deut. 3: 9), which the poet here employs as a diction somewhat more ornate, perhaps, than the common ap- pellation. t]''72Jf5"]"']2l, the young buffalo.^ or, the young -wild ox. (7) ninnb nizn , divideth thejiames of fire, I refer to the scat- tered lightning, which so frequently appears in a thunder storm. Kosenmueller seems to think that it means, ' the thunderbolts strik- ing fire.' (8)b'^n;, Hiph. Fut. as Present, from b^n, 504. 6. uinj^ , / Cadesh^ the desert through which the Israelites passed, on their way to the promised land. (9) nib'N , from Mb'i< . ni!:''^ b^ri"' , makeih the hinds to bring forth. It is said, that parturition is exceedingly difficult among this species of animals; and hence the effect of the thun- der is represented as being very great, by this description. The simple meaning is, that the terror occasioned by the thunder, pro- duces the effect in question, which is often a well known conse- quence of terror; see I Sam. 4: 19. nin^^ '^'^^.ii^ ^^ ^cys bare the forests; which marks the effects of lightning on the trees, as it strips them of their bark and foliage, or scorches both so as to de- stroy all power of vegetation. ib^'^ni^ , and in his palace, which appears to be the original meaning of the word ; temple is a se- condary meaning. In Ps. 11: 4 and 18: 7, the word seems clearly to be used for palace in heaven ; which recent commentators sup- pose to be here meant. ^i';?3, every one^ all of the iD'^bJ^. "^22 , v. 1, the suffix i being pronomen multitudinis^ as in Jer. 6: 13. Ps, 53: 4. Is. 15: 3 (written nVs), and often elsewhere. *^^N, de- 27 210 PART III. NOTES ON NO. L. clares^ speaks forth^ celebrates. ^i^3 , i. e. ilil3, his glory ^ viz. the glory of God. So De Wette ; but Rosenmueller quite di- versely, thus ; ' In his heavenly temple, throughout the universe (ilrs), the voice of Jehovah speaks his glory;' i.e. the thunder proclaims the divine glory in heaven above, and throughout all the universe below ; an expression, which, if correct, is at least a 7r5 Xeyofiii'ov of the Scriptures. I must differ from both of these commentators. In vs. 1, 2, princes and nobles, (so I understand it), are called on to praise God, on account of his power and glory ; to praise him in their sacred, splendid attire, 'D'ip""n'^'Tn2 , i. e. garments such as those put on, who worshipped in the temple or tabernacle, in Jehovah's immediate presence. Then, after recounting the ensigns of Je- hovah's power and glory, in wielding the thunder and directing the lightning, the poet resumes his exhortation ; let every one in his palace (temple) celebrate his glory ; the same idea as in the first part of the Psalm, except that here is a little amplification, iVs instead of D'^bN "'233. In this way, the sentiment is natural and easy, and is consentaneous throughout. The simple meaning is ; 'Ye who worship in his temple, princes and people, celebrate the glory of him, who wields the thunder and lightning of heav- en.' (10) S^; , sits enthroned., comp. Ps. 2: 4. 9: 8. 55: 20, et al. b')273V , on thejiood ; comp. Ps. 9: 5, t^^.'Db "^^'^2 , thou art seated on the throne^ a clear case of similar usage ; comp. also b signify- ing i, with regard to state or conditioners Is. 1: 5. Ps. 69: 22. 45'- J5. By b^3^ here, I understand (with Geseniusand De Wette) the ocean ov Jlood above the clouds or firmament; see Gen. 1: 6, 7. Meaning : 'Jehovah, who wields the thunder, also directs, con- trols the flood of water, which the thunder-cloud bears in its bo- som.' Rosenmueller: ' Jehovah who controlled the flood of Noah, still directs, and always will control, the tempests of the skies.' n'43^.2 etc., Jehovah will sit enthroned as king forever. (11) T'y , lit. strength., metaph. protection, strong hold., i. e. pro- tector, the abstract being put for the concrete. Dib"^?,mfA5q/*e- , ubertas^ abundance^ overflowings from ni"\. The idea is that of a plenteous banquet, in which the cups are filled to overflowing. (6) '^P.npl , Inf with snff. from z^l , 247. a.nin''^ ^^"2 etc., i. e. 1 shall be permitted, in circumstances of quiet and plenty, to worship before my God, all my days. How earnestly David de- sired the privilege of worshipping in God's house, is sufficiently testified by many psalms, which shew the very high value that he put upon this privilege. No LII. Ps. XXIV. If we suppose this Psalm to have been composed, and sung, at the time when the ark of the covenant was brought up to Zion by David, (2 Sam. 6: 1 seq. 1 Chron. 15: I seq) ; or on the occa- sion of the temple being dedicated by Solomon ; and that it was sung responsively by priests and people, (as bishop Lowth conjec- tures, Lect. 19) ; the beauty and force of it cannot fail to be per- ceived and felt by the reader. If the inscription is to he trusted, David was the author of the psalm. This may have been the case, even if it was first sung at the dedication of the temple ; for David, who had prepared ample materials for this building, may have prepared a song also for the occasion of its dedication. PART III, NOTES ON NO. LII. 213 (1) riNiVa , the fulness of it^ viz. of the earth, i. e. whatever it contains, ail that is on it or in it. bnn , a poetic appellation, clearly a synonyme here of yiN. nn ^3*iJ'^ , 432. a. (2) TIC'] D''73^ b^ , he founded it upon the seas^ i. e. he (Jeho- vah) built the earth upon the seas. Such is the Scriptural rep- resentation of this subject. See Ps. 18: 16 (15), where it is said, ' The channels of the waters (the sea) were presented to view,' and the parallel hemistich responds, ' The foundations of the earth were disclosed ;' i. e. the channels of the great deep are the foun- dations of the earth. So Ps. 136: 6, ' To him who spread out the earth upon {h^) the waters.' Comp. Prov. 8: 29. 2 Pet. 3: 5, 6. Thus were the Hebrews accustomed to think and speak, respecting the construction of the earth. That it is not philosophically cor- rect, i. e. that water does not constitute the interior part of our globe, cannot well be shewn, perhaps not even rendered probable. But if it could be, there would be no more objection, surely, to the sacred writers' speaking of this subject more hominum^ than there is to their saying, that ' the sun rises and sets,' or to our dai- ly affirming the same thing. Nothing can be more manifest, than that the Scriptures were not given to teach astronomy, geology, or any of the physical sciences; and, consequently, whenever any thing connected with these is the subject of affirmation, the com- mon popular modes of expression are every where employed by them. So, even after all our knowledge of the Newtonian prin- ciples of astronomy, and our universal assent to their correctness, we still continue to speak of the sun, as rising and setting ; and who is deceived or misled by this ? We ask for the sacred wri- ters only the same liberty of employing language, of which all other writers avail themselves ; and when this is granted, 'the case needs no further explanation. r7:3i^% Polel of 'j^3, the accent falling on the penult Sheva, and making a Seghol of it, 148. a, occasions the vowel, that would otherwise be written under the first 3, to be dropped, i. e. instead of rt^rs*; , we have the present form. The sentiment of this oti^og is altogether parallel with that of the one which precedes it ; ninna being here employed as a synonyme with D'^732 214 PART III. NOTES ON NO. LII. (3) But who can presume to approach the presence of this great and glorious God ? Who shall draw nigh to him, and wor- ship acceptably before him ? nin""nna, the mount of Jehovah^ i. e. Zion where the ark of the covenant rested, and where God dwelt. iUJ'ljP Dip723 , lit. in the place of his holiness, i. e. in his holy place, 440, in his sanctuary. (40) D^SD "^pD, lit. the clean of hands, y} const, of yi, like the Latin, integer vitae scelerisque purus. Adjectives are often em- ployed in this manner, 423. nnb '^ni , and pure of heart, is the same construction. Both are figurative expressions, denoting in- nocence of heart, and blameless external deportment. i "^tl^^ 1 permanent, eternal doors, in contradis- tinction, (it is natural to suppose), from the mutable and moveable tabernacle, which had never obtained a permanent station ; comp. 2 Sam. 7: 7, 8. 1 K. 8: 13.-~i